manualshive.com logo in svg

Rohde & Schwarz FPL1000 Series, User Manual

Share
Download
Rohde & Schwarz FPL1000 Series User Manual Download Page 896

Index

R&S

®

FPL1000

896

User Manual 1178.3370.02 ─ 03

Provided files (SEM) ................................................. 320
Restoring files (SEM) ................................................ 313
Settings files (SEM) .................................................. 311

Star (yellow)

see Invalid data icon ................................................... 64

Start frequency

Softkey ...................................................................... 378

Startup recall

Remote ..................................................................... 796

Startup Recall

Softkey ...................................................................... 106

Statistics

Programming example ..............................761, 782, 783

Status

Queries ..................................................................... 197

Status bar

Color coding ........................................................69, 857
Error messages .................................................. 69, 857
Hiding/restoring .........................................................129

Status byte

Remote ............................................................. 522, 524

Status byte (STB) ............................................................ 186
Status byte register (STB) ............................................... 183
Status display .................................................................... 68
Status registers ............................................................... 183

CONDition .................................................................184
ENABle ..................................................................... 184
EVENt ....................................................................... 184
model ........................................................................ 184
NTRansition .............................................................. 184
parts .......................................................................... 184
PTRansition .............................................................. 184
STAT:QUES:POW .................................................... 669
STATus:OPERation .................................................. 188
STATus:QUEStionable ............................................. 189
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit ............................. 190
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended ........................... 191
STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO ................. 191
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency  ....................... 192
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit .................................... 193
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin ............................. 193
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer ................................ 194
STATUs:QUEStionable:TEMPerature .............. 158, 819
STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe .................................... 195

Status reporting system .................................................. 182

Application ................................................................ 195
Common commands .................................................521

Step size

Markers ..................................................................... 429
Markers (remote control) .......................................... 714

Stop frequency

Softkey ...................................................................... 378

Storage location

Data files ................................................................... 103
Settings ..................................................... 104, 107, 312

Storage settings

File type .................................................................... 105

Storing

Settings ............................................................... 98, 100

String in remote commands ............................................ 176
Sub blocks

Number (Multi-SEM) ................................................. 308
Standard files ............................................................ 312

Subnet Mask ................................................................... 201
Suffixes ........................................................................... 173

Common ................................................................... 521

Support ............................................................................862

Information ........................................................ 142, 143
Information (remote) ................................................. 839

Suppressing

File name dialog ....................................................... 117

Sweep

Aborting ............................................ 401, 402, 480, 481
Configuration (Softkey) ............................................. 395
Continuous ................................................................234
Count ........................................................................ 395
Count (Spectrograms) .............................................. 474
Default settings ......................................................... 390
Mode ................................................................. 234, 395
Performing ................................................................ 234
Points ................................................................ 395, 460
Points (SEM range) .................................................. 306
Points (Spurious Emissions range) ...........................334
Settings (Spectrogram) ............................................. 402
Single ........................................................................ 234
Time (remote) ................................................... 654, 656
Type .......................................................................... 393

"Sweep Count" ................................................................ 399
Sweep list

Deleting ranges .........................................................335
Detector .................................................................... 333
Filter type .................................................................. 332
Inserting ranges ........................................................ 335
Limit absolute ............................................................335
Limit check ................................................................ 334
Preamplifier ...............................................................334
Range start/stop (Spurious Emissions) .................... 332
RBW ......................................................................... 333
Reference level ......................................................... 333
RF attenuation .......................................................... 334
RF attenuation mode ................................................ 334
Spurious Emissions .................................................. 331
Sweep points ............................................................ 334
Sweep time ............................................................... 333
Sweep time mode ..................................................... 333
Transducer ................................................................334
VBW ..........................................................................333

"Sweep List"

Deleting ranges .........................................................307
Fast SEM .................................................................. 303
Filter type .................................................................. 303
Inserting ranges ........................................................ 307
Limit absolute ............................................................305
Limit check ................................................................ 305
Limit relative ..............................................................305
Preamplifier ...............................................................304
Range start/stop (SEM) ............................................ 303
RBW ......................................................................... 303
Reference level ......................................................... 304
RF attenuation .......................................................... 304
RF attenuation mode ................................................ 304
SEM .......................................................................... 302
Softkey ...................................................................... 302
"Sweep Points" (SEM) .............................................. 306
"Sweep Time"  .......................................................... 304
"Sweep Time Mode"  ................................................ 304
Symmetrical .............................................................. 307
Transducer ................................................................305
VBW ..........................................................................304

"Sweep Points" ................................................................ 400
Sweep status

Status register ...........................................................188

Summary of Contents for FPL1000 Series

Page 1: ...R S FPL1000 Spectrum Analyzer User Manual User Manual 1178 3370 02 03 ÜQÔ2 ...

Page 2: ... attenuator 1323 1990 02 R S FPL1000 B30 DC power supply 1323 1877 02 R S FPL1000 B31 Li Ion battery pack and charger 1323 1725 02 R S FPL1 K9 1323 1754 02 2017 Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG Mühldorfstr 15 81671 München Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R S is a re...

Page 3: ...ation Notes Application Cards White Papers etc 10 3 Welcome to the R S FPL1000 11 4 Getting Started 12 4 1 Preparing for Use 12 4 2 Instrument Tour 33 4 3 Trying Out the Instrument 44 4 4 Operating the Instrument 62 5 Applications Measurement Channels and Result Displays 81 5 1 Available Applications 81 5 2 R S MultiView 82 5 3 Defining Channel Setups 83 5 4 Running a Sequence of Measurements 85 5...

Page 4: ... 12 Zoomed Displays 507 7 13 Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation 511 7 14 Optimizing Measurements 518 8 Remote Commands 520 8 1 Conventions Used in SCPI Command Descriptions 520 8 2 Common Suffixes 521 8 3 Common Commands 521 8 4 Commands for Remote Instrument Operation 525 8 5 Selecting the Operating Mode and Application 526 8 6 Configuring and Performing Measurements 534 8...

Page 5: ...370 02 03 10 2 Error Messages in Remote Control Mode 858 10 3 Troubleshooting Remote Operation 859 10 4 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Hints 860 10 5 Collecting Information for Technical Support 862 List of Commands Spectrum mode 864 Index 880 ...

Page 6: ...Contents R S FPL1000 6 User Manual 1178 3370 02 03 ...

Page 7: ...y Instructions safety issues are grouped according to subjects For example one subject is electrical safety The Basic Safety Instructions are delivered with the R S FPL1000 in different languages in print Throughout the documentation safety instructions are provided when you need to take care during setup or operation Always read the safety instructions carefully Make sure to comply fully with the...

Page 8: ...the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating pro cedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board 1 2 3 Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to ill...

Page 9: ...ontrol a complete description of the remote control com mands with programming examples and information on maintenance instrument interfaces and error messages Includes the contents of the getting started manual Firmware application manual Contains the description of the specific functions of a firmware application includ ing remote control commands Basic information on operating the R S FPL1000 i...

Page 10: ...rder numbers and optional accessories The brochure provides an overview of the instrument and deals with the specific char acteristics See www rohde schwarz com brochure datasheet FPL1000 2 7 Release Notes and Open Source Acknowledgment OSA The release notes list new features improvements and known issues of the current firmware version and describe the firmware installation The open source acknow...

Page 11: ...customer requirements Offering low phase noise wide analysis bandwidth and straightforward and intuitive operation the analyzer makes measurements fast and easy This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the instrument pro vides including remote control operation The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www rohde schwarz com product FPL1000 ...

Page 12: ...nt in addition to the safety instructions in the following sections In particular Do not open the instrument casing Risk of instrument damage due to inappropriate operating conditions Specific operating conditions are required to ensure accurate measurements and to avoid damage to the instrument Observe the information on appropriate operating conditions provided in the basic safety instructions a...

Page 13: ...results To suppress generated electromagnetic interference EMI Use suitable shielded cables of high quality For example use double shielded RF and LAN cables Always terminate open cable ends Note the EMC classification in the data sheet Unpacking and Checking the Instrument 13 Accessory List 14 Placing or Mounting the Instrument 14 Connecting the AC Power 16 Changing the AC Supply Fuse 17 Connecti...

Page 14: ...rging Secure the instrument to prevent any movement and other mechanical effects dur ing transportation The carrying handles are designed to lift or carry the instrument Do not apply exces sive external force to the handles 4 1 1 2 Accessory List The instrument comes with the following accessories Power cable Printed Getting Started manual 4 1 1 3 Placing or Mounting the Instrument The R S FPL1000...

Page 15: ...ce anything underneath The feet can break if they are overloaded The overall load on the folded out feet must not exceed 200 N Fmax Risk of injury when stacking instruments insecurely Never stack instruments on top of each other The instrument s top surface area is too small to stack multiple instruments Stacked instruments can tilt over and cause injury or damage the instrument If you need to sta...

Page 16: ...lation The transparent cover allows you to operate the instrument without removing it from the bag With the help of the optional vest holster you can carry the R S FPL1000 in its bag and keep your hands free Together with the optional battery pack see Chapter 4 1 1 7 Con necting an Optional Battery Pack R S FPL1 B31 on page 18 and packed in the dedicated carrying bag the R S FPL1000 is ideally sui...

Page 17: ... AC supply fuses 1 Disconnect the power cable 2 Open the flap covering the fuse holder using a small screwdriver or similar 3 Remove the fuse holder 4 Remove the fuse and install the new one 5 Reinsert the fuse holder 6 Close the flap 4 1 1 6 Connecting an Optional DC Power Supply R S FPL1 B30 The R S FPL1000 can also be equipped with an optional internal DC power supply R S FPL1 B30 If installed ...

Page 18: ...below these values charging is inter rupted If the battery temperature rises above 53 C charging is stopped When the battery is being charged in standby mode the POWER LED blinks During operation the status bar indicates that the battery is being charged The battery pack is not charged in the factory The battery pack must be charged before it is used the first time A new battery pack or a battery ...

Page 19: ...the AC power switch on the rear panel to position O For DC power operation disconnect the DC power supply cable The R S FPL1000 changes into off mode Risk of losing data If you switch off the running instrument using the rear panel switch or by disconnecting the power cord and no charged battery is available the instrument loses its current settings Furthermore program data may be lost Press the P...

Page 20: ...nment results again later Press the SETUP key Press the Alignment softkey 4 1 1 10 Checking the Supplied Options The instrument may be equipped with both hardware and firmware options To check whether the installed options correspond to the options indicated on the delivery note proceed as follows 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the System Config softkey 3 Switch to the Versions Options tab in the S...

Page 21: ...s to protect your instruments from infection Use strong firewall settings and scan any removable storage device used with a Rohde Schwarz instru ment regularly It is also recommended that you install anti virus software on the instru ment Rohde Schwarz does NOT recommend running anti virus software in the background on access mode on Windows based instruments due to potentially degrading instrumen...

Page 22: ...commended that you change the password for both users after initial login An administrator can change the password in Windows for any user at any time via Start Settings Account SignIn Options Password Change Changing the password and use of auto login function Note that when you change the default passwords the default auto login function no longer works Reactivate it manually as described in Rea...

Page 23: ...tarts the firmware Adapting the automatic login function to a new password If you change the Instrument user s password which is used during automatic login this function no longer works Adapt the settings for the command that activates the auto login function first 1 Open the C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user NO_AUTOLOGIN REG file in any text editor e g Notepad 2 In the line De...

Page 24: ...re possible with the R S FPL1000 The following list shows various USB devices that can be useful Memory stick for easy transfer of data to from a computer e g firmware updates CD ROM drives for easy installation of firmware applications Keyboard or mouse to simplify the entry of data comments filenames etc Printer for printing measurement results Power sensors e g of the NRP Zxy family Installing ...

Page 25: ...vices Mouse touchpad to configure the mouse prop erties To access the Windows operating system press the Windows key on the exter nal keyboard Connecting a printer When printing a file the instrument checks whether a printer is connected and turned on and whether the appropriate printer driver is installed If necessary printer driver installation is initiated You only have to install a printer dri...

Page 26: ... For full screen display adjust the monitor s screen resolu tion The R S FPL1000 supports a minimum resolution of 1280x768 pixels 1 Connect the external monitor to the R S FPL1000 2 Press the SETUP key 3 Press the Display softkey 4 Select the Configure Monitor tab in the Display dialog box The standard Windows Screen Resolution dialog box is displayed 5 If necessary change the screen resolution to...

Page 27: ...ing the Instrument to the Network on page 27 Chapter 4 1 5 2 Assigning the IP Address on page 28 Note that only user accounts with administrator rights can configure LAN networks LXI The R S FPL1000 supports the LXI core features LXI gives you direct access to the LAN settings described below For further information on the LXI interface refer to Chapter 6 4 2 4 LXI Settings on page 205 4 1 5 1 Con...

Page 28: ... 4 1 5 2 Assigning the IP Address Depending on the network capacities the TCP IP address information for the instru ment can be obtained in different ways If the network supports dynamic TCP IP configuration using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP all address information can be assigned automati cally If the network does not support DHCP or if the instrument is set to use alternate TCP ...

Page 29: ... ter 4 1 5 3 Using Computer Names on page 31 5 Enter the IP Address for example 192 0 2 0 The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots Every block contains a maximum of 3 numbers 6 Enter the Subnet Mask for example 255 255 255 0 The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots Every block contains a maximum of 3 num bers 7 Select Configure Network If you have ent...

Page 30: ...Getting Started R S FPL1000 30 User Manual 1178 3370 02 03 4 In the Ethernet Status dialog box select the Properties button The items used by the LAN connection are displayed Preparing for Use ...

Page 31: ...es In a LAN that uses a DNS server Domain Name System server each PC or instru ment connected in the LAN can be accessed via an unambiguous computer name instead of the IP address The DNS server translates the host name to the IP address This is especially useful when a DHCP server is used as a new IP address may be assigned each time the instrument is restarted Each instrument is delivered with a...

Page 32: ...e use of the firewall on your instrument Rohde Schwarz instruments are shipped with the Windows firewall enabled and preconfigured in such a way that all ports and connections for remote control are enabled For more details on firewall configuration see the following Rohde Schwarz White Paper 1EF96 Malware Protection Windows 10 Note that changing firewall settings requires administrator rights 4 1...

Page 33: ...ate and time for the internal real time clock as follows Opening the Date and Time Properties dialog box 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the Display softkey 3 Select the General tab in the Display dialog box 4 Press the Set Date and Time button to open the standard Windows Date and Time Properties dialog box 5 If necessary toggle the Date and Time Format between German DE and US After you have chang...

Page 34: ...ses or other substances Solvents can damage the front panel labeling plastic parts or screens for example Never use cleaning agents to clean the outside of the instrument Use a soft dry lint free dust cloth instead 4 2 1 1 Touchscreen All measurement results are displayed on the screen on the front panel Additionally the screen display provides status and setting information and allows you to swit...

Page 35: ...ages and date time display A touchscreen is a screen that is touch sensitive that is the firmware reacts in a speci fied way when you move your fingers on the screen Using touchscreen gestures you can perform the following tasks among others See Chapter 4 3 Trying Out the Instrument on page 44 Changing a setting Changing the display Changing the displayed result range in a diagram Moving a marker ...

Page 36: ...predefined state change basic settings and pro vide print and display functions A detailed description of the corresponding functions is provided in the User Manual Table 4 1 System keys System key Assigned functions PRESET Resets the instrument to the default state SETUP Provides basic instrument configuration functions e g Reference frequency external internal Date time display configuration LAN...

Page 37: ...rovides the measurement functions Measurement of multicarrier adjacent channel power Ch Power ACLR Carrier to noise spacing C N C N0 Occupied bandwidth OBW Spectrum emission mask measurement Spectrum Emission Mask Spurious emissions Spurious Emissions Measurement of time domain power Time Domain Power Third order intercept point TOI AM modulation depth AM Mod Depth MEAS CONFIG Used to configure me...

Page 38: ...ave the value 1 as multiplying factor Thus they have the same func tion as an ENTER key ESC Closes all kinds of dialog boxes if the edit mode is not active Quits the edit mode if the edit mode is active In dialog boxes that contain a Can cel button it activates that button For Edit dialog boxes the following mechanism is used If data entry has been started it retains the original value and closes ...

Page 39: ... boxes diagrams or tables Arrow Up Arrow Down Keys The arrow up or arrow down keys do the following For numeric entries increments Arrow Up or decrements Arrow Down the instrument parameter at a defined step width In a list scrolls forward and backward through the list entries In a table moves the selection bar vertically In windows or dialog boxes with a vertical scroll bar moves the scroll bar A...

Page 40: ... power supply 4 AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch with fuse 5 GPIB IEC 625 interface 6 Reference clock connectors 7 Trigger input connector 8 DVI connector for external display 9 LAN connector 10 USB 3 0 connectors 11 NRP Power Sensor connector 12 Headphones connector 13 Aux Port serving as VNA user port or SA auxiliary port 14 IF VIDEO OUT connector 15 NOISE SOURCE CONTROL 4 2 2 1 ...

Page 41: ...ed in accord ance with DIN EN 61010 1 Appendix F2 1 Otherwise there is a risk of electric shock 4 2 2 2 AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch An AC power supply connector and main power switch are located in a unit on the rear panel of the instrument Main power switch function Position 1 The instrument is in operation Position O The entire instrument is disconnected from the AC power su...

Page 42: ...monitor or other display device to the R S FPL1000 via the DVI Digital visual interface connector to provide an enlarged display For details see Chapter 4 1 4 Connecting an External Monitor on page 25 4 2 2 7 LAN The LAN interface can be used to connect the R S FPL1000 to a local network for remote control printouts or data transfer The assignment of the RJ 45 connector sup ports twisted pair cate...

Page 43: ...polarity is configurable Short circuit hazard Always observe the designated pin assignment A short circuit can damage the port 4 2 2 11 IF Video Output The female BNC connector can be used for various outputs in the Spectrum applica tion Intermediate frequency IF output of approximately 20 MHz Video output 1V Which output is provided is defined in the software Overview Output This connector is onl...

Page 44: ...e is given in the R S FPL1000 User Manual Basic instrument operation is described in Chapter 4 4 Operating the Instrument on page 62 Prerequisites The instrument is set up connected to the mains system and started up as descri bed in Chapter 4 1 Preparing for Use on page 12 For these first measurements you use the internal calibration signal so you do not need any additional signal source or instr...

Page 45: ...t warmup time Note that the instrument requires an initial warmup time after switching it on A mes sage in the status bar Instrument warming up indicates that the operating temper ature has not yet been reached Wait until this message is no longer displayed before you start a measurement to ensure accurate results To optimize the display To optimize the display for the calibration signal we will a...

Page 46: ...he R S FPL1000 also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data A spectro gram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time The x axis shows the frequency the y axis shows the time A third dimension the power level is indicated by different colors Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies 1 Tap the Overview softkey to display ...

Page 47: ... the top right corner of the toolbar 5 Close the Overview You see the spectrogram compared to the standard spectrum display Since the calibration signal does not change over time the color of the frequency levels does not change over time i e vertically The legend at the top of the spectrogram win dow describes the power levels the colors represent Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 48: ...ations in parallel and then switch between the channel set ups automatically to perform the measurements sequentially We will demonstrate this feature by activating additional measurement channels for a different frequency range a zero span measurement and an I Q analysis To activate additional measurement channels 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel 2 On the New Channel Setup tab of the Mode ...

Page 49: ... for this spectrum display In the Frequency dialog box set the center frequency to 500 MHz and the span to 1 GHz Figure 4 9 Frequency spectrum of the calibration signal with a larger span 4 Repeat the previous steps to activate a third Spectrum window 5 Change the frequency range for this spectrum display Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 50: ...set the Reference Level value to 10 dBm As the calibration signal does not vary over time the level versus time diagram dis plays a straight line Figure 4 10 Time domain display of the calibration signal 7 Create a new measurement channel for I Q analysis a Press the MODE key b Tap the IQ Analyzer button to activate a measurement channel for the I Q Analyzer application c Tap the Display Config so...

Page 51: ...diagram for I Q analysis e Close the SmartGrid mode The IQ Analyzer measurement channel displays the real and imaginary signal parts in separate windows To display the MultiView tab An overview of all active measurement channels is provided in the MultiView tab This tab is always displayed if more than one measurement channel is active and can not be closed Tap the MultiView tab Trying Out the Ins...

Page 52: ...ments configured in the active channel setups can be performed sequentially that means one after the other automatically either once or continuously 1 Tap the Sequencer icon in the toolbar 2 Toggle the Sequencer softkey in the Sequencer menu to On A continuous sequence is started i e each channel setup measurement is per formed one after the other until the Sequencer is stopped Trying Out the Inst...

Page 53: ...et a marker on the peak in our first Spectrum measurement 1 In the MultiView tab double tap the Spectrum window frequency sweep with spectrogram display to return to the Spectrum measurement channel 2 Tap the spectrum display to set the focus on that window 3 Double tap the spectrum window to maximize it as we currently do not need the spectrogram display 4 Press the RUN SINGLE key on the front pa...

Page 54: ... 3370 02 03 6 Now you can move the marker by tapping and dragging it to a different position The current position is indicated by a dotted blue line Notice how the position and value change in the marker area of the diagram Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 55: ...om the evaluation bar to the lower half of the display to add a new window for the peak list 5 Close the SmartGrid mode 6 To obtain a more conclusive peak list that does not contain noise peaks for exam ple define a threshold that is higher than the noise floor a Press the MKR key on the front panel b Tap the Marker Config softkey in the Marker menu c Tap the Search tab in the Marker dialog box d ...

Page 56: ...ltiple Zoom icon in the toolbar The icon is highlighted to indicate that multiple zoom mode is active 2 Tap the diagram near the first peak and drag your finger to the opposite corner of the zoom area A white rectangle is displayed from the point where you tapped to the current position Figure 4 15 Defining the zoom area When you remove your finger the zoom area is enlarged in a second sub win dow...

Page 57: ...results To optimize the results we will increase the number of sweep points from the default 1001 to 32001 a Press the SWEEP key on the front panel b Tap the Sweep Config softkey in the Sweep menu c In the Sweep Points field enter 32001 d Close the Bandwidth dialog box e Press the RUN SINGLE key on the front panel to perform a new sweep with the increased number of sweep points Figure 4 17 Zoomed ...

Page 58: ...fine a zoom area around markers M2 M3 and M4 Figure 4 18 Multiple zoom windows 5 Tap the Multiple Zoom icon in the toolbar again and define a zoom area around marker M5 6 To increase the size of the third zoom window drag the splitter between the win dows to the left or right or up or down Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 59: ...nstrument settings to a file 1 Tap the Save icon in the toolbar 2 Press the keyboard key on the front panel to display the online keyboard as you will have to enter text in the next step 3 In the Save dialog box tap the File Name field and enter MyMultiViewSetup using the keyboard Keep the default File Type setting Instrument with all Channel Setups to store the configuration of all channel setups...

Page 60: ...t any time using the settings file 1 Press the PRESET button to restore the default instrument settings so you can check that the stored user settings are actually restored afterwards 2 Tap the Load icon in the toolbar 3 In the Load dialog box select the MyMultiViewSetup dfl file in the default directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user 4 Tap the Load button All instrument sett...

Page 61: ...e Trace Data Export tab 4 Tap the Export Trace to ASCII File button 5 Enter the file name MyMultiViewResults The trace data is stored to MyMultiViewResults DAT To create a screenshot of the display 1 Tap the Print immediately icon in the toolbar A screenshot of the current display is created Note that the colors on the screen are inverted in the screenshot to improve printout results 2 In the Save...

Page 62: ...ver apply excessive force to the screen Touch it gently Never scratch the screen surface for example with a finger nail Never rub the screen surface strongly for example with a dust cloth For instructions on cleaning the screen see Chapter 9 1 Cleaning on page 855 Understanding the Display Information Spectrum Mode 62 Accessing the Functionality 70 Entering Data 73 Touchscreen Gestures 74 Getting ...

Page 63: ...status bar or chan nel bar to enlarge the display area for the measurement results Setup Display Displayed Items For details see Chapter 6 3 2 Display Settings on page 126 Channel Setup Bar 63 Window Title Bar 66 Marker Information 67 Frequency and Span Information in Diagram Footer 68 Instrument and Status Information 68 Error Information 69 4 4 1 1 Channel Setup Bar Using the R S FPL1000 you can...

Page 64: ... is displayed that is the trace no longer matches the displayed instrument settings This can happen for example when you change the measurement bandwidth but the displayed trace is still based on the old bandwidth As soon as a new measurement is performed or the display is updated the icon disap pears The icon indicates that an error or warning is available for that channel setup This is particula...

Page 65: ...FSV default default not displayed Mode Indicates which sweep mode type is used Auto FFT automatically selected FFT sweep mode Auto sweep automatically selected swept sweep mode Icons for individual settings A bullet next to the setting indicates that user defined settings are used not automatic settings A green bullet indicates this setting is valid and the measurement is correct A red bullet indi...

Page 66: ...hannel bar and entering a new name For an overview of default names see INSTrument LIST on page 528 Remote command INSTrument REName on page 529 4 4 1 2 Window Title Bar Each channel in the R S FPL1000 display can contain several windows Each window can display either a graph or a table as a result of the channel measurement The win dow title bar indicates which type of evaluation is displayed Whi...

Page 67: ... brackets after the index indicates the trace to which the marker is assigned Example M2 1 defines marker 2 on trace 1 For more than two markers a separate marker table is displayed beneath the diagram by default Marker information in marker table In addition to the marker information displayed within the diagram grid a separate marker table may be displayed beneath the diagram This table provides...

Page 68: ...le Label Information CF Center frequency Span Frequency span frequency domain display ms Time per division time domain display Pts Number of sweep points or rounded number of currently displayed points in zoom mode 4 4 1 5 Instrument and Status Information Global instrument settings and functions such as LXI configuration mode the instru ment status and any irregularities are indicated in the stat...

Page 69: ...e g the settings no lon ger match the displayed results or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily Gray Information Information on the status of individual processing steps No color No errors No message displayed normal operation Green Measurement successful Some applications visualize that the measurement was successful by show ing a message If any error information is av...

Page 70: ... refer to Chapter 4 1 1 9 Performing a Self Alignment on page 19 WRONG_FW The firmware version is out of date and does not support the currently installed hard ware Until the firmware version is updated this error message is displayed and self alignment fails For details refer to Chapter 6 3 4 4 Firmware Updates on page 139 4 4 2 Accessing the Functionality All tasks necessary to operate the instr...

Page 71: ...e More softkey indicates that the menu contains more softkeys than can be dis played at once on the screen When pressed it displays the next set of softkeys Recognizing the softkey status by color Color Meaning Orange Associated dialog box is open Blue Associated function is active for toggle keys currently active state Gray Instrument function is temporarily not available due to a specific settin...

Page 72: ...oard display can be switched on and off as desired using the On Screen Keyboard function key beneath the screen When you press this key the display switches between the following options Keyboard displayed at the top of the screen Keyboard displayed at the bottom of the screen No keyboard displayed You can use the TAB key on the on screen keyboard to move the focus from one field to another in dia...

Page 73: ... transparent and is not affected by the slider Particularities in Windows dialog boxes In some cases e g if you want to install a printer original Windows dialog boxes are used In these dialog boxes the rotary knob and function keys do not work Use the touchscreen instead Entering Numeric Parameters If a field requires numeric input the keypad provides only numbers 1 Enter the parameter value usin...

Page 74: ...s finger gestures on the screen The basic gestures supported by the software and the most important applications are described here Further actions using the same gestures may be pos sible Tapping Touch the screen quickly usually on a specific element You can tap most elements on the screen in particular any elements you can also click on with a mouse pointer Figure 4 21 Tapping Double tapping Tap...

Page 75: ...s Move two fingers together on the display pinch or move two fingers apart on the dis play spread When you pinch two fingers in the display you decrease the size of the currently dis played area showing the surrounding areas previously out of view When you spread two fingers in the display you increase the size of the currently dis played area showing more details You can pinch or spread your fing...

Page 76: ...trigger offset value if available not in free run Spreading or pinching a spectrum display changes the center frequency and span horizontal or reference level and range vertical or a combination of these set tings diagonal Spreading or pinching a time domain display changes the sweep time and trigger offset horizontal or reference level position and range vertical or a combination of these setting...

Page 77: ...nsitive and provides information specifically for the current opera tion or setting to be performed In addition general topics provide an overview on com plete tasks or function groups as well as background information 4 4 5 1 Calling Up Help The online help can be opened at any time by selecting one of the Help icons on the toolbar or by pressing the F1 key on an external or the online keyboard C...

Page 78: ...f the table of contents Up arrow previous topic Down arrow next topic To browse the topics visited before Left arrow back Right arrow forward To increase or decrease the font To navigate the Help use the touchscreen Alternatively you can also use the naviga tion keys on the front panel To search for a topic in the index The index is sorted alphabetically You can browse the list or search for entri...

Page 79: ... remote PC Various methods for remote control are supported Connecting the instrument to a LAN network see Chapter 4 1 5 Setting Up a Network LAN Connection on page 27 Using the LXI browser interface in a LAN network Using the Windows Remote Desktop application in a LAN network Connecting a PC via the GPIB interface How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in the User Manual The...

Page 80: ...e applications files and network resources of the instrument Thus remote operation of the instrument is possible The Remote Desktop Client is part of the installed Windows operating system For other versions of Windows Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add on 4 4 6 3 Connecting a PC via the GPIB Interface You can connect a PC to the R S FPL1000 via the GPIB interface to send remote ...

Page 81: ...urement settings by creating several channel setups for the same application The number of channel setups that can be configured at the same time depends on the available memory on the instrument For more information on creating channel setups see Chapter 5 3 Defining Channel Setups on page 83 Available Applications 81 R S MultiView 82 Defining Channel Setups 83 Running a Sequence of Measurements ...

Page 82: ...t on page 529 Analog Demod The Analog Demodulation application provides measurement functions for demodulat ing AM FM or PM signals This application requires the optional firmware R S FPL1 K7 to be installed For details see the Analog Demodulation Mode User Manual Remote command INST SEL ADEM see INSTrument SELect on page 529 Noise Figure The Noise Figure application provides noise figure measurem...

Page 83: ...tions Measurement Channels and Result Displays R S FPL1000 83 User Manual 1178 3370 02 03 5 3 Defining Channel Setups Access MODE The default channel setup uses the Spectrum application Defining Channel Setups ...

Page 84: ... switch between measure ments quickly and easily Defining a channel setup 84 New Channel Setup 85 Replace Current Channel Setup 85 Duplicate Current Channel 85 Closing a channel setup 85 Defining a channel setup To start a new channel setup or replace an existing one select the corresponding application in the Mode dialog box Note The channel setups are labeled with the application name If that na...

Page 85: ...ly active channel setup can be duplicated i e a new channel setup of the same type and with the identical measurement settings is started The name of the new channel setup is the same as the copied channel setup extended by a consecu tive number e g Spectrum Spectrum 2 Remote command INSTrument CREate DUPLicate on page 527 Closing a channel setup To close a channel setup simply close the correspon...

Page 86: ...ual channel setups are updated in the tabs as the measurements are performed Sequential operation itself is independent of the cur rently displayed tab Sequencer modes Three different Sequencer modes are available Single Sequence Similar to single sweep mode each measurement is performed once until all mea surements in all defined Channel s have been performed Continuous Sequence Similar to contin...

Page 87: ...er IQ Analyzer Single Sweep 7 For Single Sequence the following sweeps will be performed 5x Spectrum 6x Spectrum 2 2 x Spectrum 3 7x IQ Analyzer For Continuous Sequence the following sweeps will be performed 5x Spectrum 6x Spectrum 2 2 x Spectrum 3 7x IQ Analyzer 5x Spectrum 6x Spectrum 2 2 x Spectrum 3 7x IQ Analyzer For Channel defined Sequence the following sweeps will be performed 5x Spectrum ...

Page 88: ...ate 88 Sequencer Mode 88 Sequencer State Activates or deactivates the Sequencer If activated sequential operation according to the selected Sequencer mode is started immediately Remote command SYSTem SEQuencer on page 531 INITiate n SEQuencer IMMediate on page 530 INITiate n SEQuencer ABORt on page 530 Sequencer Mode Defines how often which measurements are performed The currently selected mode so...

Page 89: ...NGLE or RUN CONT key The measurements configured in the currently active channel setups are per formed one after the other in the order of the tabs until the Sequencer is stopped The result displays in the individual channel setups are updated as the measure ments are performed To stop the Sequencer To stop the Sequencer temporarily press the highlighted RUN SINGLE or RUN CONT key not for a channe...

Page 90: ...isplay settings that are usually configured during initial instrument setup independently of the current measurement e g which items or colors are displayed on the screen are described in Chapter 6 3 2 1 Display Settings on page 126 Laying out the Result Display with the SmartGrid 90 Changing the Size of Windows 95 5 6 1 Laying out the Result Display with the SmartGrid Measurement results can be e...

Page 91: ... The same evaluation method can be displayed in multiple windows simultaneously New windows are added by dragging an evaluation icon from the evaluation bar to the screen The position of each new window depends on where you drop the eval uation icon in relation to the existing windows All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode When Smart Grid mode is activated the evalua...

Page 92: ...ow would be replaced the drop area is highlighted in a darker color shade Positioning the window The screen can be divided into up to four rows Each row can be split into up to four columns where each row can have a different number of columns However rows always span the entire width of the screen and may not be interrupted by a column A single row is available as the drop area for the window in ...

Page 93: ... the MEAS CONFIG menu The SmartGrid functions and the evaluation bar are displayed To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the Close icon in the right hand corner of the toolbar or press any key 5 6 1 3 How to Add a New Result Window Each type of evaluation is displayed in a separate window Up to 16 individual windows can be displayed per channel setup i e per tab ...

Page 94: ...ow to Arrange the Result Windows 1 Select an icon from the evaluation bar or the Move icon for an existing evaluation window 2 Drag the evaluation over the SmartGrid A blue area shows where the window will be placed 3 Move the window until a suitable area is indicated in blue 4 Drop the window in the target area The windows are rearranged to the selected layout and Delete and Move icons are displa...

Page 95: ... setup tab may contain several windows to evaluate the measurement results using different methods A splitter allows you to change the size of neighbor ing windows The splitters are not available in SmartGrid mode To change the size of two neighboring windows drag the splitter between the win dows in either direction Configuring Result Displays ...

Page 96: ...the toolbar at the top of the screen You can hide the toolbar display e g when using remote control to enlarge the display area for the measurement results Setup Display Displayed Items See Dis played Items on page 127 Windows 96 Open 96 Store 96 Print immediately 96 Undo 97 Redo 97 Zoom mode 97 Multiple zoom mode 97 Zoom off 97 SmartGrid 97 Sequencer 97 Help Select 97 Help 97 Windows Displays the...

Page 97: ...ultiple zoom areas can be defined for the same diagram Zoom off Displays the diagram in its original size SmartGrid Activates SmartGrid mode to configure the screen layout Sequencer Opens the Sequencer menu to perform consecutive measurements Help Select Allows you to select an object for which context specific help is displayed See Chapter 4 4 5 Getting Help on page 77 Help Displays context sensi...

Page 98: ...ment Alternatively to the factory default settings you can define user specific recall settings to be restored after a preset or reboot see To recall settings automatically after preset or reboot on page 109 To restore the default instrument configuration for all channel setups at once Press the PRESET key After you use the PRESET function the history of previous actions is deleted i e any actions...

Page 99: ...tings Quick Save Quick Recall a defined set of instrument settings or channel setups are stored or recalled quickly in just one step Configurable Save Recall a user defined set of instrument settings or channel setups are stored to a definable storage location Restrictions when recalling measurement settings When recalling a saved configuration file the following restrictions apply The R S FPL1000...

Page 100: ... you want to apply the changed limit values after recalling the save set you must force the application to reload the limit file To do so simply open the Edit Limit Line dialog box see Chapter 7 11 2 2 Limit Line Settings and Functions on page 495 and toggle the Y Axis unit Due to that change the limit line file is auto matically reloaded and the changed limit values are applied to the current mea...

Page 101: ...ed QuickSave 1 QuickSave 10 101 Storage Type Save only 101 Recall 102 QuickSave 1 QuickSave 10 Selects one of the save sets to store the current settings in or to be recalled At the time of storage the QuickSave 1 QuickSave 10 placeholder is replaced by a label indicating the storage date and time and the storage type During recall save sets of type Instrument replace the settings of the entire in...

Page 102: ...hannel setup is extended by a consecutive number In remote commands you must append this number to the channel setup name as well Remote command MMEMory LOAD STATe on page 796 6 2 2 2 Configurable Storage and Recall The more sophisticated storage and recall functions allow you to define which settings are stored and where the settings file is stored to Any settings file can be selected for recall ...

Page 103: ... location and filename are selected in a file selection dialog box which is displayed when you perform a storage function By default the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an under score and three numbers e g limit_lines_005 In the example the base name is limit_lines The base name can contain characters numbers and underscores The file extension dfl is added automatically...

Page 104: ...instrument or an external drive The default storage location for the SEM settings files is C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL sem_std Remote command MMEMory CATalog on page 786 File Name Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension By default the name of a user file consists of a base name followed by an underscore Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three n...

Page 105: ...ct ITEM TRACe ACTive on page 795 MMEMory SELect ITEM TRANsducer ALL on page 795 Save File Saves the settings file with the defined filename Remote command MMEMory STORe n STATe on page 797 MMEMory STORe n STATe NEXT on page 798 Recall in New Channel Recall in Current Channel Restores the instrument settings as saved in the selected settings file If the settings file contains settings for a specifi...

Page 106: ... Name 107 Comment 107 Startup Recall Activates or deactivates the startup recall function If activated the settings stored in the selected file are loaded each time the instrument is started or preset If deactivated the default settings are loaded Note that only instrument settings files can be selected for the startup recall function not Channel files Remote command MMEMory LOAD AUTO on page 796 ...

Page 107: ...d to a file and loaded again later so that you can repeat the measurement with the same settings Optionally user defined measure ment settings can automatically be restored each time you start or preset the instru ment To save and recall instrument settings using the Quick Save function 1 Select the Save icon from the toolbar 2 Select whether the instrument settings for all Channel s are stored or...

Page 108: ...ile remember to save the settings again Otherwise those settings cannot be restored and will be overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled To recall configurable instrument settings 1 Select the Open icon from the toolbar 2 In the Recall dialog box switch to the Recall tab 3 In the file selection dialog box select the filename and storage location of the set tings fil...

Page 109: ... the results of the per formed measurements However you may want to evaluate the data with further external applications In this case you can export the measurement data to a standard format file ASCII or XML Some of the data stored in these formats can also be re imported to the R S FPL1000 for further evaluation later for example in other applica tions The following data types can be exported de...

Page 110: ... page 813 MMEMory STORe n SPECtrogram on page 812 Trace Export Configuration Export Opens the Traces dialog box to configure the trace and data export settings I Q Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to define an export file name to which the I Q data is stored This function is only available in single sweep mode It is not available in the Spectrum application only in applications that...

Page 111: ...Chapter 8 9 4 Storing or Print ing Screenshots on page 799 To print a screenshot of the current display with the current settings immediately with out switching to the Print menu use the Print immediately icon in the toolbar Print Content Settings 111 Print Preview Functions 114 Printer Settings 115 Page Setup 118 Print Color Settings 119 Print Content Settings Access Print Print Config Content ta...

Page 112: ...rument Functions R S FPL1000 112 User Manual 1178 3370 02 03 Print Screenshot 113 Print Multiple Windows 113 Comment 113 Print Logo 113 Print Page Count 113 Print Dialog 113 Print Date and Time 114 Data Management ...

Page 113: ...rrently set to an image file or the clipboard it is automatically changed to be a PDF file Remote command HCOP CONT WIND HCOPy PAGE WINDow device STATe on page 808 HCOPy PAGE WINDow device CHANnel STATe on page 807 Comment Defines an optional comment to be included in the printout of the display Maximum 120 characters are allowed Up to 60 characters fit in one line In the first line a man ual line...

Page 114: ...lected Print Date and Time Includes or removes the current date and time at the bottom of the printout Remote command HCOPy TDSTamp STATe device on page 809 Print Preview Functions Access Print The Print Preview of the printout according to the current configuration is available in all Print Settings dialog tabs Data Management ...

Page 115: ... Page Down Depending on the selected contents see Print Content Settings on page 111 the printout can consist of multiple pages Use these functions to scroll within the preview to see the individual pages Print Starts to print or store the selected screen contents to a file see Print Content Set tings on page 111 Whether the output is sent to the printer or stored in a file or the clipboard depend...

Page 116: ...ns R S FPL1000 116 User Manual 1178 3370 02 03 Destination 116 Suppress File Name Dialog 117 Printer Name 117 Print to file 117 Install Printer 117 Destination Defines the medium to which the printout is output Data Management ...

Page 117: ...the Printer Name list Remote command HCOPy DESTination device on page 803 HCOPy DEVice LANGuage device on page 803 Suppress File Name Dialog If the Destination is a file the file selection dialog box is not displayed Instead the default storage location and filename are used C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user FPL_ScreenShot_ date and time Printer Name Defines the printer to print...

Page 118: ...on page 116 Orientation 118 Windows Per Page 118 Scaling 119 Margins 119 Orientation Selects the page orientation of the printout portrait or landscape Remote command HCOPy PAGE ORIentation device on page 807 Windows Per Page Defines how many windows are displayed on a single page of the printout This setting is only available if Print Multiple Windows is active see Print Content Settings on page ...

Page 119: ...inted as large as possible while maintaining the aspect ratio of the original display Size to fit Each window is scaled to fit the page size optimally not regarding the aspect ratio of the original display Remote command HCOPy PAGE WINDow device SCALe on page 808 Margins Defines margins for the printout page on which no elements are printed The margins are defined according to the selected unit Re...

Page 120: ...Store or Print Screenshots of the Display The measurement results displayed on the screen can be printed or stored to a file very easily To start printing or storing results to a file If the R S FPL1000 has already been set up according to your current require ments simply press the Print immediate icon at the far right end of the tool bar The current measurement display is printed or stored to a ...

Page 121: ... tab select Printer as the Destination 4 Select the Printer Name to print to from the list of installed printers 5 In the Page Setup tab configure the layout of the printout page a Select the page orientation b Define the page margins c Check the Print Preview to make sure all relevant elements of the display are visible 6 In the Color tab define the colors to be used for the printout a By default...

Page 122: ...on dialog box being displayed for each print operation select Suppress File Name Dialog In this case the previously used or default storage location and filename are used C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user FPL_ScreenShot_ date and time 7 In the Page Setup tab configure the layout of the printout page a Select the page orientation b Define the page margins c Check the Print Previe...

Page 123: ... I Q Analyzer 2 Switch to the MultiView tab to display an overview of the result displays in all active channel setups 3 Select the Printer tool in the toolbar The Print Settings dialog box is displayed 4 In the Content tab select Print Selected Windows 5 Select the result displays listed in step 1 6 Enter the comment Measurement Test Report to be inserted at the top of each page 7 Select Print Pa...

Page 124: ...at reflects the col ors you see on the screen but with a white background 16 Check the Print Preview to make sure all required result displays are included and all relevant data elements are visible a Scroll through the individual pages of the printout using Page Up and Page Down b Use the zoom functions to make sure all relevant parts of the result display are visible 17 Select Print to execute t...

Page 125: ...ce Int Ext The R S FPL1000 can use the internal reference source or an external reference source as the frequency standard for all internal oscillators A 10 MHz crystal oscillator is used as the internal reference source In the external reference setting all internal oscillators of the R S FPL1000 are synchronized to the external reference frequency External references are connected to one of the ...

Page 126: ...al Display Settings 126 Displayed Items 127 Display Theme and Colors 131 General Display Settings Access SETUP Display General This section includes general screen display behavior and date and time display Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen 126 Display Update Rate 127 Set Date and Time 127 Date and Time Format 127 Background Lighting 127 Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen The to...

Page 127: ...ta transfer for example dur ing remote control it can be helpful to decrease the frequency with which the screen display is updated Set Date and Time The current date and time on the instrument is set using the standard Windows Date and Time Properties dialog box Select the Set Date and Time button in the Dis play dialog box or select the date and time display in the status bar to open the Win dow...

Page 128: ...ate and Time 129 Front Panel 130 Mini Front Panel 130 Toolbar The toolbar provides access to frequently used functions via icons at the top of the screen Some functions such as zooming finding help printing screenshots or storing and loading files are not accessible at all without the toolbar Remote command DISPlay TBAR STATe on page 825 General Instrument Setup ...

Page 129: ... is only displayed for a few seconds when you select a key Thus you can access the functionality Then the bar is hidden again until the next time you select a key or switch the Softkey Bar dis play back on Note The softkey bar is hidden while the SmartGrid is displayed and restored auto matically when the SmartGrid is closed Remote command DISPlay SKEYs STATe on page 825 Channel Bar The channel se...

Page 130: ...ia remote control from a com puter To activate or deactivate the front panel temporarily press the F6 key on the external keyboard if available or the remote computer For more information see Chapter 6 3 2 4 How to Work with the Soft Front Panels on page 135 Remote command SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe on page 826 Mini Front Panel If you require a front panel display but do not want to lose too much...

Page 131: ... is useful when you are working from a remote PC and the front panel function is not active Remote command SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe on page 826 Display Theme and Colors Access SETUP Display Theme Color You can configure the used colors and styles of display elements on the screen For step by step instructions see Chapter 6 3 2 3 How to Configure the Colors for Display and Printing on page 133 G...

Page 132: ...lable Print Colors Defines the color settings used for printout If Show Print Colors on Display is activated the currently selected print colors are displayed as a preview for your selection Optimized Colors Selects an optimized color setting for the printout to improve the visi bility of the colors default setting Trace 1 is blue trace 2 black trace 3 green and the markers are turquoise The backg...

Page 133: ... 10 format If you connect a monitor or projector using a different format e g 4 3 the calibration will not be correct and the screen will not react to your touch actions properly The touchscreen has a screen resolution of 1280x800 pixels Most external monitors have a higher screen resolution If the screen resolution of the monitor is set higher than the instrument s resolution the application wind...

Page 134: ... print colors 2 Select Modify User Defined Colors The Screen Color Setup dialog box is opened 3 From the Selected Object list select the object to which you want to assign a color 4 Do one of the following Select a color from the Predefined Colors Select the Userdefined Colors button to define a different color The Preview area indicates the currently selected color 5 To assign a user specific col...

Page 135: ...ey If you want the window to remain open deactivate the Auto close option You can close the window manually by selecting Close planel or the key combination ALT M be aware of the keyboard language defined in the operating system To display the soft front panel or mini front panel 1 Press the SETUP key and select the Display softkey 2 Select the Displayed Items tab 3 Select Front Panel On or Mini F...

Page 136: ...essages 138 Firmware Updates 139 General Configuration Settings 141 Additional Interfaces 141 6 3 4 1 Hardware Information Access SETUP System Configuration Hardware Info An overview of the installed hardware in your R S FPL1000 is provided Every listed component is described by its serial number order number model infor mation hardware code and hardware revision This information can be useful whe...

Page 137: ...nt EULA for LucasFonts RSCorpid Expired option licenses If an option is about to expire a message box is displayed to inform you You can then use the Install Option function to enter a new license key If an option has already expired a message box appears for you to confirm In this case all instrument functions are unavailable including remote control until the R S FPL1000 is rebooted You must the...

Page 138: ...e to install options Install Option by XML Opens a file selection dialog box to install an additional option to the R S FPL1000 using an XML file Enter or browse for the name of an XML file that contains the option key and select Select Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to install options 6 3 4 3 System Messages Access SETUP System Configuration System Messages The system messa...

Page 139: ...rmware Update During instrument start the installed hardware is checked against the current firmware version to ensure the hardware is supported If not an error message is displayed Wrong Firmware Version and you are asked to update the firmware Until the firm ware version is updated self alignment fails To see which components are not sup ported see the System Messages The firmware on your R S FP...

Page 140: ...OTICE Stop measurement The firmware update must not be performed during a running measurement If a measurement is running stop it by pressing the highlighted RUN CONT or RUN SINGLE key 3 Select the SETUP key 4 Select the System Config softkey 5 Select the Firmware Update tab 6 In the file selection dialog box select the FPLSetup exe file 7 Select Install to start the update 8 After the firmware up...

Page 141: ...g can also be configured Preset Mode 141 Out of range value behavior 141 Preset Mode The presettings can be defined in the Config tab of the System Configuration dialog box SAN Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Remote command SYSTem PRESet COMPatible on page 839 Out of range value behavior By default if you enter a value that is outside the valid range in an input field for a set ting a warning is...

Page 142: ...ive a trig ger High A high signal 5 V indicates the instrument is ready to receive a trigger Remote command OUTPut UPORt WTRigger POLarity LOW HIGH see the R S FPL1000 user manual 6 3 5 Service Functions Access SETUP Service When unexpected problems arise with the R S FPL1000 some service functions may help you solve them R S Support Information 142 Self test Settings and Results 143 Calibration S...

Page 143: ...d the current date and time of the file creation If you contact the Rohde Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice SINFo on page 840 Save Device Footprint Creates an xml file with information on installed hardware software image and FPGA versions The xml file is stored under...

Page 144: ...ou start a self test If you start a self test remotely then select the Local softkey while the test is still run ning the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is comple ted In this case the self test cannot be aborted Remote command TST on page 525 DIAGnostic SERVice STESt RESult on page 819 6 3 5 3 Calibration Signal Display Access SETUP Service Calibration Signal ...

Page 145: ...cy on page 818 Frequency Calibration Frequency RF Defines the frequency of the internal broadband calibration signal to be used for IF fil ter calibration max 64 MHz 6 3 5 4 Service Functions Access SETUP Service Service Function Using service functions The service functions are not necessary for normal measurement operation Incorrect use can affect correct operation and or data integrity of the R...

Page 146: ...s the selected service function Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction on page 839 Clear History Deletes the list of previously selected service functions Password Most service functions require a special password as they may disrupt normal opera tion of the R S FPL1000 There are different levels of service functions depending on how restrictive their use is handled Each service level has a d...

Page 147: ...e correction val ues are calculated again If several measured values are combined in one point only one value is taken into consideration If the active transducer line is not defined for the entire sweep range the missing values are replaced by zeroes When a transducer is used the trace is shifted by a calculated factor However an upward shift reduces the dynamic range for the displayed values Thu...

Page 148: ...R S FPL1000 since only the set frequency range is taken into account for mea surements The minimum frequency of a data point is 0 Hz the maximum fre quency 200 GHz The value range for the transducer factor is 200 dB Gain has to be entered as a negative value and attenuation as a positive value Storing transducer factors Transducer factors can also be stored with the configuration settings so they ...

Page 149: ...nt Access SETUP Transducer The settings required to manage all transducer lines on the instrument are described here For the transducer line overview the R S FPL1000 searches for all stored transducer lines with the file extension TDF in the C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL trd directory The overview allows you to determine which transducer lines are available and can be used for the current me...

Page 150: ...nt measurement settings For more information on which conditions a transducer line must fulfill to be compati ble see Chapter 6 3 6 1 Basics on Transducer Factors on page 147 Activating Deactivating Activates deactivates the transducer line Up to 8 transducer lines can be active at the same time Remote command SENSe CORRection TRANsducer SELect on page 822 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer STATe on page...

Page 151: ... RLEVel STATe on page 820 Create New Line Create a new transducer line Remote command SENSe CORRection TRANsducer SELect on page 822 Edit Line Edit an existing transducer line configuration Copy Line Copy the selected transducer line configuration to create a new line Delete Line Delete the selected transducer line Remote command SENSe CORRection TRANsducer DELete on page 821 Transducer Factors Ac...

Page 152: ...e Windows conventions for file names The transducer data is stored under this name with a TDF extension in the C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL trd directory Remote command SENSe CORRection TRANsducer SELect on page 822 Comment Defines an optional comment for the transducer line The text may contain up to 40 characters Remote command SENSe CORRection TRANsducer COMMent on page 820 Unit The unit...

Page 153: ...se the entry will not be accepted and the an error message is displayed The frequencies of the data points may exceed the valid frequency range of the R S FPL1000 since only the set frequency range is taken into account for mea surements The minimum frequency of a data point is 0 Hz the maximum fre quency 200 GHz The value range for the transducer factor is 200 dB Gain has to be entered as a negat...

Page 154: ...rther eval uation in other applications Transducer factors stored in the specified ASCII CSV for mat can also be imported to the R S FPL1000 for other measurements see Import on page 154 This reference describes in detail the format of the export import files for transducer factors Note that the bold data is mandatory all other data is optional Different language versions of evaluation programs ma...

Page 155: ...calling transducer and limit line settings on page 100 The following tasks are described How to find compatible transducer lines on page 155 How to activate and deactivate a transducer on page 155 How to edit existing transducer lines on page 156 How to copy an existing transducer line on page 156 How to delete an existing transducer line on page 156 How to configure a new transducer line on page ...

Page 156: ... icon in the toolbar See Chapter 6 2 2 Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data on page 98 How to copy an existing transducer line 1 In the Transducer dialog box select the transducer line 2 Select the Copy button The Edit Transducer dialog box is opened with the configuration of the selected transducer 3 Define a new name to create a new transducer with the same configuratio...

Page 157: ... entry and then select Insert Value To delete a data point select the entry and then Delete Value 5 Check the current line configuration in the preview area of the dialog box If neces sary correct individual data points or add or delete some If necessary shift the entire line vertically or horizontally by selecting the Shift x or Shift y button and defining the shift width 6 Save the new configura...

Page 158: ...results The alignment results are displayed and contain the following information Date and time of last correction data record Overall results of correction data record List of found correction values according to function module The results are classified as follows PASSED Calibration successful without any restrictions CHECK Deviation of correction value larger than expected correction could how...

Page 159: ...use After an image update or after exchanging a hard disk If you notice that touching a specific point on the screen does not achieve the cor rect response If the position of the instrument has been changed and you cannot look straight on the screen If another person operates the instrument 6 3 7 2 Alignment Settings Access SETUP Alignment Both the instrument and the touchscreen can be aligned whe...

Page 160: ...Await Warm Up Operation before Self Alignment Displays a message indicating the remaining warmup time required before self align ment is performed After the warmup operation has completed self alignment is star ted automatically Shut down Device after Self Alignment If activated the R S FPL1000 is automatically shut down after self alignment is com pleted Note that the instrument cannot be restart...

Page 161: ...at the instrument has reached its operating temperature for details refer to the data sheet To perform a self alignment 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Select the Alignment softkey 3 Select the Start Self Alignment button 4 To abort the self alignment process select the Abort Self Alignment button Once the system correction values have been calculated successfully a message is displayed To display the ali...

Page 162: ... to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 209 6 4 1 Remote Control Basics Basic information on operating an instrument via remote control is provided here This information applies to all applications and operating modes on the R S FPL1000 For additional information on remote control of spectrum analyzers see the following application notes available from the Rohde Schwarz website 1EF62 Hints and Tri...

Page 163: ... controller is a prerequisite for remote control using the indicated interfaces See also Chapter 6 4 1 3 VISA Libraries on page 171 Within this interface description the term GPIB is used as a synonym for the IEC IEEE bus interface LAN Interface To be integrated in a LAN the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface consisting of a connector a network interface card and protocols The network car...

Page 164: ... the newer HiSLIP protocol INSTR indicates the instrument resource class optional port determines the used port number SOCKET indicates the raw network socket resource class Example Instrument has the IP address 192 1 2 3 the valid resource string using VXI 11 protocol is TCPIP 192 1 2 3 INSTR The DNS host name is FPL1003 123456 the valid resource string using HiSLIP is TCPIP FPL1003 123456 hislip...

Page 165: ...ng versatile locking mechanisms Usable for IPv6 or IPv4 networks Using VXI 11 each operation is blocked until a VXI 11 device handshake returns However using HiSLIP data is sent to the device using the fire and forget method with immediate return Thus a successful return of a VISA operation such as viWrite does not guarantee that the instrument has finished or started the reques ted command but is...

Page 166: ...nt controls are available via the front panel simulation File upload and download between the instrument and the remote PC is also available Using this feature several users can access and operate the R S FPL1000 simultaneously This is useful for troubleshooting or training purposes For details see How to Configure the LAN Using the LXI Web Browser Interface on page 213 and Chapter 6 4 3 5 How to ...

Page 167: ...ent the LXI home page belongs to To identify the instrument activate the Device Indicator Then check the LAN Status indicator of the instruments LAN Configuration allows you to configure LAN parameters and to initiate a ping See Ping Client on page 215 See Status Bar displays information about the LXI status of the instrument Utilities provides access to the LXI event log functionality required by...

Page 168: ...ress on page 216 You can set the GPIB address and the ID response string The GPIB language is set as SCPI by default and cannot be changed for the R S FPL1000 Notes and Conditions In connection with the GPIB interface note the following Up to 15 instruments can be connected The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m or 2 m times the number of devices whichever is less the cable leng...

Page 169: ...Common Instrument Functions R S FPL1000 169 User Manual 1178 3370 02 03 Figure 6 1 Communication lines used by the GPIB interface Network and Remote Operation ...

Page 170: ...nts addressed as listeners Command Effect on the instrument GET Group Execute Trigger Triggers a previously active instrument function e g a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input GTL Go to Local Transition to the local state manual control GTR Go to Remote Transition to the remote state remote control PPC Parallel Poll Configure Co...

Page 171: ... to communicate between the con troller and the instrument Interface messages can only be sent by instruments that have GPIB bus functionality For details see the sections for the required interface Instrument messages Instrument messages are employed in the same way for all interfaces if not indica ted otherwise in the description Structure and syntax of the instrument messages are described in C...

Page 172: ...ends to the controller after a query They can contain measurement results instrument settings and information on the instrument status 6 4 1 5 SCPI Command Structure SCPI commands consist of a header and in most cases one or more parameters The header and the parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank The headers may consist of several mnemonics keywords...

Page 173: ...ric_value numeric_value Long and short form 173 Numeric Suffixes 173 Optional Mnemonics 174 Long and short form The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form The short form is marked by upper case letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Either the short form or the long form can be entered other abbreviations are not permitted Example HCOPy DEVice COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP...

Page 174: ...the long command to comply with the SCPI standard Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics Example Definition HCOPy IMMediate Command HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the effect of the command Example Definition DISPlay WINDow 1 4 MAXimize Boolean...

Page 175: ...li U micro N nano Example SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5GHz SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5E9 Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent According to SCPI this unit is represented by the PCT string Example HCOP PAGE SCAL 90PCT Special Numeric Values The following mnemonics are special numeric values In the response to a query the numeric value is provided MIN and MAX denote the minimum and maximum value...

Page 176: ...um numeric value as a result Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 The numeric values are provided as the response for a query Example Setting command HCOPy DEV COL ON Query HCOPy DEV COL Response 1 Text Parameters Text parameters o...

Page 177: ...format requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length Overview of Syntax Elements The following tables provide an overview of the syntax elements and special charac ters Table 6 5 Syntax elements The colon separates the mn...

Page 178: ... The two following commands with identical meaning can be created SENS BAND RES 1 SENS BWID RES 1 Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted Example HCOPy IMMediate HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times or omitted Example SENSe LIST FREQuency numeric_value numeric_value The fo...

Page 179: ... to SCPI the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488 2 The requested parameter is transmitted without a header Example HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND Maximum values minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numeric values Example SENSe FREQuency STOP MAX Response 3 5E9 Numeric values are output w...

Page 180: ...hin one command line even though they may be implemented as sequential commands are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they have been received In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a cer tain order each command must be sent in a separate command line Example Commands and queries in one message The response to a query combined in a program message with commands...

Page 181: ...roller OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR after all previous commands have been exe cuted Setting bit 0 in the ESE Setting bit 5 in the SRE Waiting for service request SRQ OPC Stops command processing until 1 is returned This occurs when all pending opera tions are completed Send OPC directly after the command whose processing must be terminated before other commands can be executed WA...

Page 182: ...sequence OPC ESR A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished 6 4 1 7 Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument and on errors which have occurred This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue Both can be queried via GPIB bus or LAN interface STATus commands Se...

Page 183: ...TAT QUES FREQuency not used OVEN COLD LO UNLocked External REFerence STAT QUES LIMit n LIMit 1 FAIL LIMit 2 FAIL LIMit 3 FAIL LIMit 4 FAIL LIMit 5 FAIL LIMit 6 FAIL LIMit 7 FAIL LIMit 8 FAIL DIQ logic AND logic OR of all bits TEMPerature 15 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 0 1 2 not used STAT QUES TEMPerature Frontend temp error INPut_overload Range completed SWEeping MEASuring Waiting for TRIGger one register for e...

Page 184: ...e ENABle part of the ESR Structure of a SCPI Status Register Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts Each part has a width of 16 bits and has different functions The individual bits are independent of each other i e each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts Bit 15 the most significant bit is set to zero for all parts Thus the contents of the register p...

Page 185: ...t only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it This part is often equated with the entire register ENABle The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit see below Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the associated ENABle bit sym...

Page 186: ...e STB can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy The STB is read using the command STB or a serial poll The STatus Byte STB is linked to the Service Request Enable SRE register Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes...

Page 187: ... in a single bit It can be read by means of a parallel poll see Parallel Poll on page 196 or using the command IST The parallel poll enable register PPE determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag The bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE The IST flag results from the ORing of all results The PPE can be...

Page 188: ... to manual control 7 Power On supply voltage on This bit is set on switching on the instrument STATus OPERation Register The STATus OPERation register contains information on current activities of the R S FPL It also contains information on activities that have been executed since the last read out You can read out the register with STATus OPERation CONDition or STATus OPERation EVENt Table 6 10 M...

Page 189: ...tatus bit in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific subregisters In this case you must check the subregister of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a subregister always returns the result for the currently selected channel Table 6 11 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus ...

Page 190: ...e during a measurement or premeasurement it cannot find a burst during a measurement or premeasurement the results deviate too much from the expected value during premeasurements 12 ACPLimit device specific This bit is set if a limit during ACLR measurements is violated in any of the active channels The STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit Register provides more information on the error type 13 14 Unused ...

Page 191: ... by the other status registers of the R S FPL A separate EXTended regis ter exists for each active channel You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable EXTended CONDition or STATus QUEStionable EXTended EVENt Table 6 13 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable EXTended register Bit No Meaning 0 not used 1 INFO This bit is set if a status message is available for the applicatio...

Page 192: ...nger possi ble 5 to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency Register The STATus QUEStionable FREQuency register contains information about the condi tion of the local oscillator and the reference frequency A separate frequency register exists for each active channel You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition or STATus QUEStionable FREQuency E...

Page 193: ... 1 LIMit 2 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated 2 LIMit 3 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 3 is violated 3 LIMit 4 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 4 is violated 4 LIMit 5 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 5 is violated 5 LIMit 6 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 6 is violated 6 LIMit 7 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 7 is violated 7 LIMit 8 FAIL This bit is set if limit line ...

Page 194: ...ed 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable POWer Register The STATus QUEStionable POWer register contains information about possible overload situations that may occur during operation of the R S FPL A separate power register exists for each active channel You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition or STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt Table 6 18 Meaning of the bits us...

Page 195: ...ble TIME EVENt Table 6 19 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable TIMe register Bit No Meaning 0 not used 1 Sweep time too low This bit is set if the sweep time is too low 2 to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 Application of the Status Reporting System The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status of one or several devices in a measuring system To do this and rea...

Page 196: ...st on page 845 Serial Poll In a serial poll just as with command STB the status byte of an instrument is queried However the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster The serial poll method is defined in IEEE 488 1 and used to be the only standard pos sibility for different instruments to poll the status byte The method also works for instruments which do not adhere to SC...

Page 197: ...ransferred as a single decimal number To make this possible each bit is assigned a weighted value The decimal number is calculated as the sum of the weighted values of all bits in the register that are set to 1 Example The decimal value 40 32 8 indicates that bits no 3 and 5 in the status register e g the QUEStionable status summary bit and the ESB bit in the STatus Byte are set Error Queue Each e...

Page 198: ...e parts of all other registers with 1 yes yes Fill PTRansition parts with 1 Clear NTRansition parts yes yes Clear error queue yes yes yes Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1 1 1 Clear command processing and input buffer yes yes yes 1 The first command in a command line that immediately follows a PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINA TOR clears the output buffer 6 4 1 8 General Programming Recommendations Initial ...

Page 199: ...ror more precisely than the status regis ters Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well 6 4 2 Network and Remote Control Settings Access SETUP Network Remote The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 8 10 6 Configuring t...

Page 200: ...onfiguration 201 Computer Name Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name but this name can be changed The naming conventions of Windows apply If too many characters and or numbers are entered an error message is displayed in the status line The default instrument name is a non case sensitive string with the following syntax Type variant serial_number For example FPL1003 123456 Th...

Page 201: ...ver is available DHCP On this setting is read only The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots Each block con tains 3 numbers in maximum e g 100 100 100 100 but also one or two numbers are allowed in a block as an example see the preinstalled address DHCP Switches between DHCP server available On or not available Off If a DHCP server is available in the network the IP address ...

Page 202: ...wed The default address is 20 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess on page 831 Identification String Defines the identification string for the R S FPL1000 which is provided as a response to the IDN query Maximum 36 characters are allowed Remote command SYSTem IDENtify STRing on page 832 Reset to Factory String Restores the default identification string Each R S FPL1000 has a unique ...

Page 203: ...RTERminator on page 831 I O Logging Activates or deactivates the SCPI error log function All remote control commands received by the R S FPL1000 are recorded in the following log file C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL ScpiLogging ScpiLog txt Logging the commands may be extremely useful for debug purposes e g in order to find misspelled keywords in control programs Remote command SYSTem CLOGging ...

Page 204: ...t values in order to repeat previous measurements or support existing control applications as in legacy systems Language 204 Language Defines the system language used to control the instrument Note Emulating previous R S signal and spectrum analyzers This function is also used to emulate previous R S signal and spectrum analyzers As a rule the R S FPL1000 supports most commands from previous R S s...

Page 205: ...twork configurations modifying device configurations monitoring connections from the device to other devices The LXI tab of the Network Remote dialog box provides basic LXI functions and information for the R S FPL1000 Alternatively you can change the LAN settings using the LXI Web browser interface For details see How to Configure the LAN Using the LXI Web Browser Interface on page 213 Only user ...

Page 206: ... enabled connected devices are detected automatically using the VXI 11 protocol see VXI 11 Protocol on page 165 Remote command SYSTem LXI INFO on page 833 LXI Password Password for LAN configuration The default password is LxiWebIfc Remote command SYSTem LXI PASSword on page 834 LXI Manufacturer Description Instrument description of the R S FPL1000 Remote command SYSTem LXI MDEScription on page 83...

Page 207: ...sage during remote operation can be displayed on the screen see Display Remote Errors on page 203 If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer the oldest error message is removed before the newest one is inserted To clear the message buffer use the Clear Error List button It is automatically cleared when the R S FPL1000 is shut down The following information is availabl...

Page 208: ...splayed The measurement diagrams traces and display fields are displayed again If at the time of pressing the LOCAL softkey the synchronization mechanism via OPC OPC or WAI is active the currently running measurement procedure is aborted and synchronization is achieved by setting the corresponding bits in the registers of the status reporting system Bit 6 User Request of the Event Status Register ...

Page 209: ...ion test and measurement a common requirement is central monitoring of the T M instruments for remote maintenance and remote diagnostics Equipped with the Remote Desktop software of Windows the R S FPL1000 ideally meets require ments for use in production The computer that is used for remote operation is called controller here The following tasks can be performed using Remote Desktop Access to the...

Page 210: ... however data transfer is still performed using the TCP IP protocol An IP address has to be assigned to the instrument and the computer see How to Assign the IP Address on page 210 Note As the R S FPL1000 uses a 1 GBit LAN a crossover cable is not necessary due to Auto MDI X functionality To establish a non dedicated network connection connect a commercial RJ 45 cable to one of the LAN ports To es...

Page 211: ... support DHCP or if you choose to disable dynamic TCP IP configuration you must assign valid address information before connecting the instrument to the LAN Contact your network administrator to obtain a valid IP address Assigning the IP address on the R S FPL1000 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the Network Remote softkey 3 Double tap the Local Area Connection entry 4 In the Local Area Connection St...

Page 212: ... mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots Every block contains 3 numbers in maxi mum 10 Close the dialog box If you have entered an invalid IP address or subnet mask the message out of range is displayed in the status line If the settings are correct the configuration is saved and you are prompted to restart the instrument 11 Confirm the displayed message Yes button to restart the ins...

Page 213: ...is especially useful when a DHCP server is used as a new IP address may be assigned each time the instrument is restarted Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name but this name can be changed To change the instrument s computer name 1 Press the SETUP key and then the Network Remote softkey The current Computer Name is displayed in the Network tab 2 Enter the new computer name an...

Page 214: ...o activate or deactivate the LXI status icon on the status bar of the R S FPL1000 A green LXI status symbol indicates that a LAN connection has been established a red symbol indicates an error for example that no LAN cable is connected When a device is connecting to the instrument the LXI logo blinks The Device Indicator setting is not password protected The most important control elements in the ...

Page 215: ...u can change the LXI password in the Network Remote dialog box see Chap ter 6 4 2 4 LXI Settings on page 205 Advanced LAN Configuration The LAN Configuration Advanced LAN Configuration parameters are used as fol lows The Negotiation configuration field provides different Ethernet speed and duplex mode settings In general the Auto Detect mode is sufficient ICMP Ping must be enabled to use the ping ...

Page 216: ...ut a network connection either temporarily or perma nently no special measures are necessary Windows automatically detects the inter ruption of the network connection and does not set up the connection when the instru ment is switched on If you are not prompted to enter the user name and password proceed as described in How to Activate or Deactivate the Automatic Login Mechanism on page 218 6 4 3 ...

Page 217: ... new user can be created on the instrument using the User Account dialog box 1 Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system 2 In the Start menu select Control Panel and then select User Accounts 3 Select Give other users access to this computer and then Add The Add New User dialog box is displayed 4 Enter the name of the new user in the text field and select Next 5 Define ...

Page 218: ...ord before the firmware is started Reactivating the automatic login mechanism 1 In the Start menu select Run The Run dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the command C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL USER AUTOLOGIN REG 3 Press the ENTER key to confirm The automatic login mechanism is reactivated It will be applied the next time the instrument is switched on 6 4 3 4 How to Share Directories only with ...

Page 219: ... Enter the IP address of the R S FPL1000 in the browser s address bar The R S FPL1000 s Welcome page is displayed 3 In the navigation pane select Instrument Control Web Control The instrument s display is shown in a new browser window with a software front panel displayed beside or below it 4 Use the mouse cursor to access the functionality in the software front panel or in the display as you woul...

Page 220: ...ile b Under File to Upload select Browse to open a file selection dialog box and select the required file on the PC c Select Upload to copy the file from the PC to the defined folder on the R S FPL1000 6 4 3 6 How to Deactivate the Web Browser Interface If you want to prevent other users in the LAN from accessing or operating the R S FPL1000 via its LXI web browser interface you must deactivate th...

Page 221: ...rument screen contents are displayed on the remote com puter and Remote Desktop provides access to all of the applications files and net work resources of the instrument Thus remote operation of the R S FPL1000 is pos sible With Windows Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system For other ver sions of Windows Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add on For details refer to t...

Page 222: ...ia Remote Desktop 2 Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system 3 In the Start menu select the Control Panel and then System and Security 4 In the System area select Allow remote access 5 Define which users are to be given access to the R S FPL1000 via Remote Desk top Note The user account under which configuration is carried out is automatically enabled for Remote Deskto...

Page 223: ...the Start menu select Control Panel and then select User Accounts 3 Select Give other users access to this computer The User Accounts dialog box is displayed with a list of users and the user group they are assigned to 4 Give existing users the right to access the R S FPL1000 via Remote Desktop a Select the user from the list and then select the Properties button b As the level of access you want ...

Page 224: ...Remove button b Select OK to confirm the action Note Users with administrator rights retain their access rights via Remote Desktop even when they have been removed from the Remote Desktop Users Group 7 Select OK to close the dialog box How to Configure the Controller Remote Desktop Client With Windows Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system and can be accessed via Start Programs Acce...

Page 225: ...is the options are activated or deactivated 5 To improve the performance you can deactivate the Desktop background Show window contents while dragging and Menu and window animation options 6 Open the Local Resources tab to enable printers local drives and serial interfa ces 7 If you will need to access drives of the controller from the R S FPL1000 e g in order to store settings or to copy files fr...

Page 226: ...roller on page 224 open the General tab 2 In the Computer field enter the IP address of the R S FPL1000 In the User name field enter instrument to log in as an administrator or Normal User to log in as a standard user In the Password field enter 894129 3 To save the connection configuration for later use a Select the Save As button The Save As dialog box is displayed b Enter the name for the conne...

Page 227: ...Front Pan els on page 135 8 To deactivate or activate the Softfrontpanel press the F6 key After the connection is established the R S FPL1000 screen is displayed in the Remote Desktop application window The Windows Start menu can be made available by expanding the Remote Desktop window to full size During the connection with the controller the login entry is displayed on the R S FPL1000 screen To ...

Page 228: ...the safety query with Yes The connection with the controller is terminated and the R S FPL1000 is shut down 6 4 3 8 How to Start a Remote Control Session from a PC When you switch on the R S FPL1000 it is always in manual operation state local state and can be operated via the front panel To start remote control 1 Send an addressed command GTR Go to Remote from a controller to the instru ment The ...

Page 229: ...o to Local i e deactivate the REN line of the remote control interface If the instrument is operated exclusively in remote control it is recommended that you switch off the display For details see Remote Display Update on page 203 6 4 3 9 How to Return to Manual Operation Before you switch back to manual operation all remote command processing must be completed Otherwise the instrument will switch...

Page 230: ...Axis Configuration 381 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration 390 Trigger and Gate Configuration 405 Adjusting Settings Automatically 418 Marker Usage 421 Trace Configuration 459 Display and Limit Lines 488 Zoomed Displays 507 Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation 511 Optimizing Measurements 518 7 1 Configuration Overview Access all menus Each channel setup provides an overv...

Page 231: ...apter 7 2 6 5 SEM Configuration on page 301 For Spurious measurements Spurious Setup see Chapter 7 2 7 4 Spurious Emissions Measurement Configuration on page 331 7 Optionally Outputs Requires option R S FPL1 B5 see Chapter 7 3 3 Output Settings on page 373 8 Analysis See Chapter 7 10 Trace Configuration on page 459 and Chapter 7 9 Marker Usage on page 421 9 Display See Chapter 5 6 Configuring Resu...

Page 232: ...ONFIG key The easiest way to configure measurements is using the configuration Overview see Chapter 7 1 Configuration Overview on page 230 In addition to the measurement specific parameters the general parameters can be configured as usual see Chapter 7 The Spectrum Application RF Measurements on page 230 Many measurement functions provide special result displays or evalua tion methods however in ...

Page 233: ...as peak levels and spec trum traces The Frequency menu is displayed This is the default measurement if no other function is selected Use the general measurement settings to configure the measurement e g via the Overview see Chapter 7 1 Configuration Overview on page 230 Remote command SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 645 SENSe FREQuency STOP on page 645 INITiate n IMMediate on page 536 INITiate n CON...

Page 234: ...nt Sweep Config dialog box see Sweep Average Count on page 399 3 If necessary configure a trigger for the measurement Trigger Gate Config dia log box see Chapter 7 7 Trigger and Gate Configuration on page 405 4 Define how the results are evaluated for display Trace dialog box see Chap ter 7 10 1 2 Trace Settings on page 466 5 If necessary configure the vertical axis of the display Amplitude dialog...

Page 235: ... measuring an unknown signal you can usually start with the presettings High input values If levels higher than 30 dBm 1 W are expected or are possible a power attenuator must be inserted before the RF input of the analyzer Otherwise signal levels exceed ing 30 dBm can damage the RF attenuator or the input mixer The total power of all occurring signals must be taken into account Test setup Connect...

Page 236: ...reasing the Frequency Resolution The frequency resolution of the marker is determined by the resolution of the trace A trace consists of 1001 trace points i e if the frequency span is 1 MHz each trace point represents a span of approximately 1 kHz This corresponds to a maximum uncertainty of 0 5 kHz You can increase the resolution of the trace by reducing the frequency span Reducing the frequency ...

Page 237: ...nal Frequency Using the Signal Counter The built in signal counter allows you to measure the frequency more accurately than measuring it with the marker The frequency sweep is stopped at the marker and the R S FPL1000 measures the frequency of the signal at the marker position see also Chapter 7 9 4 1 Precise Frequency Signal Count Marker on page 438 In the following example the frequency of the g...

Page 238: ...the intrinsic noise the accuracy of the level measurement is influenced by the intrinsic noise of the R S FPL1000 The displayed noise level of a signal analyzer depends on its noise figure the selected RF attenuation the selected reference level the selected resolution and video band width and the detector For details see Chapter 7 5 1 2 RF Attenuation on page 383 Chapter 7 5 1 1 Reference Level o...

Page 239: ...ive sweeps are averaged To perform averaging the R S FPL1000 automatically switches on the sample detector The RF signal therefore can be more clearly distinguished from noise Figure 7 2 RF sine wave signal with low S N ratio with an averaged trace 6 Instead of trace averaging you can select a video filter that is narrower than the resolution bandwidth Set the trace mode back to Clear Write then s...

Page 240: ... the noise is reduced by 10 dB Set the RBW to 100 kHz The displayed noise is reduced by approximately 10 dB The signal therefore emerges from noise by about 10 dB Compared to the previous setting the video bandwidth has remained the same i e it has increased relative to the smaller reso lution bandwidth The averaging effect of the video bandwidth is therefore reduced The trace will be noisier Figu...

Page 241: ...nents i e they are displayed as a single component see also Chapter 7 6 1 1 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth on page 390 Two signals with the same amplitude can be resolved if the resolution bandwidth is smaller than or equal to the frequency spacing of the signal If the resolution bandwidth is equal to the frequency spacing the spectrum display shows a level dro...

Page 242: ...oltages which are visible in the trace in the transition area between the two signals Figure 7 6 Measurement of two equally leveled RF sinusoidal signals with the resolution band width which corresponds to the frequency spacing of the signals Matching generator and R S FPL1000 frequencies The level drop is located exactly in the center of the display only if the generator frequencies match the fre...

Page 243: ...olution band width which is larger than their frequency spacing 6 Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 kHz The two generator signals are shown with high resolution However the sweep time becomes longer At smaller bandwidths the noise display decreases simulta neously 10 dB decrease in noise floor for a decrease in bandwidth by a factor of 10 Measurements and Results ...

Page 244: ...side bands can be resolved with a narrow bandwidth and measured separately The modulation depth of a carrier modulated with a sinusoidal signal can then be measured Since the dynamic range of a signal ana lyzer is very large extremely small modulation depths can also be measured precisely For this purpose the R S FPL1000 provides measurement routines that output the modulation depth numerically in...

Page 245: ...ces of the delta markers to the main marker and outputs the numeric value in the marker information Figure 7 10 Measurement of the AM modulation depth The modulation depth is displayed as MDepth The frequency of the AF signal can be obtained from the frequency display of the delta marker Measuring AM Modulated Signals The R S FPL1000 rectifies the RF input signal that is removes the negative parts...

Page 246: ...ect Zero Span 4 Set the sweep time to 2 5 ms 5 Set the reference level to 6 dBm and the display range to linear AMPT Scale Config Scaling Linear Percent 6 Define triggering in response to the AF signal using the video trigger to produce a static image a Press the TRIG key b Select Video c Set the Trg Gate Level to 50 The trigger level is displayed as a horizontal line across the entire measurement...

Page 247: ...me 7 2 1 6 Measurement Examples in Zero Span For radio transmission systems that use the TDMA method for example GSM trans mission quality is determined not only by spectral characteristics but also by character istics in zero span A timeslot is assigned to each user since several users share the same frequency Smooth operation is ensured only if all users adhere exactly to their assigned timeslot...

Page 248: ... RF Atten Manual 6 Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz BW Res BW 7 Set the sweep time to 1 ms SWEEP Sweep Time Manual The R S FPL1000 shows the GSM burst continuously across the display 8 Using the video trigger set triggering on the rising edge of the burst a Press the TRIG key b Set the Trg Source to Video c Set the Trg Gate Level to 70 The R S FPL1000 shows a static image with the GSM burst a...

Page 249: ...verage mean power during the activation phase of the burst Figure 7 14 Measurement of the average power during the burst of a GSM signal Measuring the Edges of a GSM Burst with High Time Resolution Due to the high time resolution of the R S FPL1000 at the 0 Hz display range the edges of TDMA bursts can be measured precisely The edges can be shifted to the display area using the trigger offset Figu...

Page 250: ... the MEAS key b Select All Functions Off 2 Increase the time resolution to 100 µs SWEEP Sweep Time Manual 3 Shift the rising edge of the GSM burst to the center of the display by defining a trig ger offset a Press the TRIG key b Select Trigger Offset c By turning the rotary knob counterclockwise reduce the trigger offset until the burst edge is displayed in the center of the display or enter 50 µs...

Page 251: ... resolution Measuring the Signal to Noise Ratio of Burst Signals When TDMA transmission methods are used the signal to noise ratio or the dynamic range for deactivation can be measured by comparing the power values during the activation phase and the deactivation phase of the transmission burst Therefore the R S FPL1000 provides a measurement for absolute and relative power in zero span In the fol...

Page 252: ...the display see step 3 in Measuring the Edges of a GSM Burst with High Time Resolution on page 249 8 Activate power measurement within the activation phase of the burst in zero span a Press the MEAS key b Select Time Domain Power c Select Time Dom Power Config d Set the Limits state to On e Select the Left Limit input field f By turning the rotary knob clockwise move the vertical line S1 to the st...

Page 253: ...r when using optional firmware applications not all evaluation methods are available The evaluation methods described here are available for most measurements in the Spectrum application Diagram 253 Marker Table 254 Marker Peak List 254 Result Summary 255 Spectrogram 255 Diagram Displays a basic level vs frequency or level vs time diagram of the measured data to evaluate the results graphically Th...

Page 254: ...1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 632 Results CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 714 CALCulate n MARKer m Y on page 727 Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be e...

Page 255: ...page 471 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SGR see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 632 7 2 3 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Measuring the power in channels adjacent to the carrier or transmission channel is useful to detect interference The results are displayed as a bar chart for the individual channels About Channel Power Measurements 255 Channel Power Results 256 Channel Power ...

Page 256: ...t signal within the selected resolution bandwidth correctly irrespective of the amplitude distribution without additional correc tion factors being required The R S FPL1000 software allows you to perform ACLR measurements on input con taining multiple signals for different communication standards A measurement stan dard is provided that allows you to define multiple discontiguous transmit channels...

Page 257: ...o 11 In the R S FPL1000 display only the first neighboring channel of the carrier TX channel is labeled Adj adjacent channel all others are labeled Alt alternate channels In this manual Adjacent refers to both adjacent and alternate channels The measured power values for the TX and adjacent channels are also output as a table in the Result Summary window Which powers are measured depends on the nu...

Page 258: ...on see Opti mized Settings Adjust Settings on page 266 The easiest way to configure a measurement is using the configuration Overview see Chapter 7 1 Configuration Overview on page 230 Sweep Time 258 Frequency Span 259 Resolution Bandwidth RBW 260 Video Bandwidth VBW 260 Detector 261 Trace Averaging 261 Reference Level 261 Sweep Time The Sweep Time is selected depending on the desired reproducibil...

Page 259: ...or in the Sweep configuration dialog box see Sweep Time on page 266 Frequency Span The frequency span must cover at least the channels to be measured plus a measure ment margin of approximately 10 If the frequency span is large in comparison to the channel bandwidth or the adjacent channel bandwidths being analyzed only a few points on the trace are available per channel The calculated waveform fo...

Page 260: ... Adjust Settings function in the Ch Power menu or the General Settings tab of the ACLR Setup dialog box see Optimized Settings Adjust Settings on page 266 You can set the RBW manually in the Bandwidth configuration dialog box see RBW on page 397 Except for the IS95 CDMA standards the Adjust Settings function sets the resolution bandwidth RBW as a function of the channel bandwidth RBW 1 40 of Chann...

Page 261: ...e limited number of measurement points used to calculate the power in the channel the sample detector would yield less stable results The RMS detector can be set for the defined channel settings automatically Use the Adjust Settings function in the Ch Power menu or the General Settings tab of the ACLR Setup dialog box see Optimized Settings Adjust Settings on page 266 You can set the detector manu...

Page 262: ...ction in the AUTO SET menu or manually in the Amplitude menu 7 2 3 4 Channel Power Configuration Access Overview Select Measurement Channel Power ACLR CP ACLR Config Both Channel Power CP and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR measurements are available The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 8 6 3 Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR on page 542 General CP ACLR Measu...

Page 263: ...measure ments When such a standard is loaded the required channel settings are automati cally set on the R S FPL1000 However the settings can be changed The predefined standards contain the following settings Channel bandwidths Channel spacings Detector Trace Average setting Resolution Bandwidth RBW Weighting Filter Predefined standards can be selected via the CP ACLR Standard softkey in the Ch Po...

Page 264: ...OWer STANdard CATalog on page 543 To load a standard CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 542 To save a standard CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer STANdard SAVE on page 543 To delete a standard CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer STANdard DELete on page 543 Number of channels Tx Adj Up to 18 carrier channels and up to 12 adjacent channels can be defined Results are provided for the...

Page 265: ...er TRACe on page 541 Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mode The powers of the adjacent channels are output in dBm or dBm Hz absolute values or in dBc relative to the specified reference Tx channel Abs The absolute power in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the y axis e g in dBm dBµV Rel The level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of the transmission channe...

Page 266: ...tive to the fixed reference power The reference value is dis played in the Reference field in relative ACLR mode the default value is 0 dBm Note In adjacent channel power measurement the power is always referenced to a transmission channel see Reference Channel on page 265 thus this function is not available Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE on page 549 Optimized Settings Adj...

Page 267: ... general settings Standard on page 263 and Number of channels Tx Adj on page 264 are also available in this tab The following settings are available in individual subtabs of the Channel Settings tab Channel Bandwidth 267 Channel Spacings 268 Limit Check 268 Weighting Filters 269 Channel Names 269 Channel Bandwidth The Tx channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission standard The correc...

Page 268: ...t Tx channels This allows you to set up a system with equal Tx channel spacing quickly For different spacings set up the channels from top to bottom Tx1 2 Spacing between the first and the second carrier Tx2 3 Spacing between the second and the third carrier If you change the adjacent channel spacing ADJ all higher adjacent channel spac ings ALT1 ALT2 are multiplied by the same factor new spacing ...

Page 269: ...ters allow you to determine the influence of individual channels on the total measurement result For each channel you can activate or deactivate the use of the weighting filter and define an individual weighting factor Alpha value Weighting filters are not available for all supported standards and cannot always be defined manually where they are available Remote command Activating Deactivating SEN...

Page 270: ...r select Select Measurement in the Overview 2 Select Channel Power ACLR The measurement is started immediately with the default settings 3 Select the CP ACLR Standard softkey 4 Select a standard from the list The measurement is restarted with the predefined settings for the selected stan dard 5 If necessary edit the settings for your specific measurement as described in How to Set Up the Channels ...

Page 271: ...re normally defined by the selected standard but can be changed In the Channel Settings tab of the ACLR Setup dialog box select the Spacing subtab The value entered for any Tx channel is automatically also defined for all subse quent Tx channels Thus only enter one value if all Tx channels have the same spacing If the channel spacing for the adjacent or an alternate channel is changed all higher a...

Page 272: ...In the General Settings tab select the Manage User Standards button to display the Manage dialog box 4 Define a filename and storage location for the user standard By default the XML file is stored in C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL acp_std However you can define any other storage location 5 Select Save To load a user defined configuration 1 In the General Settings tab of the ACLR Setup dialog...

Page 273: ...test routines for simple channel and adjacent channel power measurements These routines give quick results without any complex or tedious set ting procedures A programming example demonstrating an ACLR measurement in a remote environ ment is provided in Chapter 8 6 3 8 Programming Examples for Channel Power Mea surements on page 557 Measurement Example 2 Measuring Adjacent Channel Power of a W CDM...

Page 274: ...e upper window and the channel power the level ratios of the adjacent channel powers and the channel configuration in the lower window The individual channels are displayed as bars in the graph 5 Set the optimal reference level and RF attenuation for the applied signal level using the Auto Level function The R S FPL1000 sets the optimum RF attenuation and the reference level for the power in the t...

Page 275: ...ured If there are discrete spurious signals in the channel Test setup Leave the RF input of the R S FPL open circuited or terminate it with 50 Ω Procedure 1 Preset the R S FPL1000 2 Set the center frequency to 1 GHz and the span to 1 MHz 3 To obtain maximum sensitivity set RF attenuation to 0 dB and the reference level to 40 dBm 4 Select the Channel Power ACLR measurement function from the Select ...

Page 276: ...ttings if you do not require the larger dynamic range see Optimization on page 400 Reduce the Sweep Time and thus the amount of data to be captured and calcu lated however consider the requirements regarding the standard deviation To improve the stability of the measured results increase the Sweep Time which also leads to more averaging steps Instead of trace averaging use an RMS detector with a h...

Page 277: ...TRA TETRa 7 2 4 Carrier to Noise Measurements Measures the carrier to noise ratio C No measurements normalize the ratio to a 1 Hz bandwidth About the Measurement 277 Carrier to Noise Results 278 Carrier to Noise Configuration 279 How to Determine the Carrier to Noise Ratio 280 7 2 4 1 About the Measurement The largest signal in the frequency span is the carrier It is searched when the C N or C N0 ...

Page 278: ...First perform the reference measurement by switching on either the C N or the C N0 measurement and waiting for the end of the next measurement run The fixed reference marker is set to the maximum of the measured carrier signal Then switch off the carrier so that only the noise of the test setup is active in the channel The carrier to noise ratio is displayed after the subsequent mea surement has b...

Page 279: ...ccess Overview Select Measurement C N C N0 Carrier Noise Config Both a carrier to noise ratio C N and a carrier to noise ratio in relation to the band width C N0 measurement are available Carrier to noise measurements are not available in zero span mode The easiest way to configure a measurement is using the configuration Overview see Chapter 7 1 Configuration Overview on page 230 The remote comma...

Page 280: ...he measurement is performed on the trace that marker 1 is assigned to To shift marker 1 and measure another trace use the Marker To Trace softkey in the Marker menu see Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 427 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 540 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 538 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer STATe on page 540 Chann...

Page 281: ...istic of a modulated signal is its occupied bandwidth that is the bandwidth which must contain a defined percentage of the power In a radio communi cations system for instance the occupied bandwidth must be limited to enable distor tion free transmission in adjacent channels About the Measurement 281 OBW Results 283 OBW Configuration 284 How to Determine the Occupied Bandwidth 286 Measurement Exam...

Page 282: ...quency range contained within those limits Then the search limits are adapted for the next carrier and the OBW is automatically recalculated for the new range For step by step instructions see How to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal using search limits on page 286 Prerequisites To ensure correct power measurement especially for noise signals and to obtain the correct occupied bandwidth ...

Page 283: ... another trace marker 1 must be placed on another trace see Assigning the Marker to a Trace The OBW calculation is repeated if the Search Limits are changed without performing a new sweep Thus the OBW for a multicarrier signal can be determined using only one sweep Remote command The determined occupied bandwidth can also be queried using the remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW or CALC MARK ...

Page 284: ...efined for marker search see Search Limits on page 432 However only the left and right limits are consid ered The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 8 6 5 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth on page 560 Power Bandwidth 284 Channel Bandwidth 285 Adjust Settings 285 Search Limits Left Right 285 Deactivating All Search Limits 285 Power Bandwidth Defines the percenta...

Page 285: ... are optimized Frequency span 3 channel bandwidth RBW 1 40 of channel bandwidth VBW 3 RBW Detector RMS The reference level is not affected by Adjust Settings For an optimum dynamic range select the reference level such that the signal maximum is close to the reference level See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 386 The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the...

Page 286: ...ansmission channel 6 To optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration select Adjust Set tings 7 Start a sweep The result is displayed as OBW in the marker results How to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal using search limits 1 Press the MEAS key or select Select Measurement in the Overview 2 Select the OBW measurement function 3 Select the OBW Config softkey 4 Define the pe...

Page 287: ...e Power Bandwidth to 99 8 Set the Channel Bandwidth to 21 kHz as specified by the PDC standard 9 Optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration by selecting Adjust Settings 10 Adjust the reference level to the measured total power by selecting Auto Level in the AUTO SET menu 11 The PDC standard requires the peak detector for OBW measurement In the Traces configuration dialog set the ...

Page 288: ...ments a Fast SEM mode is available A special limit check for SEM measurements allows for monitoring compliance of the spectrum 7 2 6 2 Typical Applications Spectrum Emission Mask measurements are typically performed to ensure that modu lated signals remain within the valid signal level ranges These ranges are defined by a particular transmission standard both in the transmission channel and neighb...

Page 289: ...g information is provided in the result summary Label Description General information Standard Loaded standard settings Tx Power Power of the reference range Tx Bandwidth Tx bandwidth used by the reference range RBW RBW used by the reference range Range results Range Low Start of the frequency range the peak value was found in Range Up Frequency range end the peak value was found in RBW RBW of the...

Page 290: ... squares in the diagram optionally see Show Peaks in the List Evaluation set tings Figure 7 23 Detected peak display in SEM measurement Furthermore you can export the results of the result summary to a file which can be exported to another application for further analysis Results for SEM with multiple sub blocks In the Spectrum application only spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub b...

Page 291: ...Ker m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 538 The measured power trace can be queried using TRAC DATA and TRAC DATA X see TRACe n DATA on page 703 and TRACe n DATA X on page 705 The measured peak power list can be queried using TRAC DATA LIST see TRACe n DATA on page 703 7 2 6 4 SEM Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in SEM measure ments is provided here for a better ...

Page 292: ...n XML file If you want a parameter set to be availa ble permanently create an XML file for this configuration for details refer to How to save a user defined SEM settings file on page 318 If you load one of the provided XML files the sweep list contains ranges and parame ters according to the selected standard Reference range The range containing the center frequency is defined as the reference ra...

Page 293: ...sweep point This allows you to increase the resolution within a specific range for detailed analysis You do not have to increase the overall number of sweep points and thus the measure ment time for the SEM measurement Symmetrical ranges You can easily define a sweep list with symmetrical range settings i e the ranges to the left and right of the reference range are defined symmetrically When symm...

Page 294: ...p List settings every time the settings change These limit lines are labeled _SEM_LINE_ xxx _ABS 0 3 and _SEM_LINE_ xxx _REL 0 3 where xxx is an index to distinguish limit lines between different channel setups The limit line defined for the currently used power class is indicated by a red line in the display The result of the limit check is indicated at the top of the diagram Note that only Pass ...

Page 295: ...the absolute limit or the higher of the absolute and relative function values the check fails Relative limit line functions A new function allows you to define limit lines whose start or end points or both are variable depending on the carrier power Thus the resulting limit line can change its slope within the range depending on the carrier power Common relative limit lines are calculated once for...

Page 296: ...theless be defined individually for each range Prerequisites Fast SEM mode is available if the following criteria apply The frequency ranges are consecutive without frequency gaps The following sweep settings are identical for details see Sweep List on page 302 Filter Type RBW VBW Sweep Time Mode Reference Level RF Attenuation Mode RF Attenuation Preamplifier Activating Fast SEM mode Fast SEM mode...

Page 297: ... mode Example Figure 7 25 Sweep list using Fast SEM mode In Figure 7 25 a sweep list is shown for which Fast SEM is activated The formerly five separately defined ranges are combined to two sweep ranges internally SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks Multi SEM In the Spectrum application application only spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels also referred to as a Multi SEM...

Page 298: ... block is defined and a standard is loaded which contains an active fast SEM setting this setting is disabled Absolute vs relative frequencies In the default configuration with only one sub block frequencies are defined relative to the center frequency this is the familiar configuration For setups with more than one sub block frequencies are defined relative to the center frequency of the referenc...

Page 299: ...ollowing combinations for overlapping ranges MAX MAX maximum of the two limit lines is used MAX SUM maximum of the two limit lines is used SUM SUM sum of the two limit lines calculated for linear powers is used NONE MAX NONE SUM limit line and parameters of the NONE range are ignored NONE NONE depends on the position of the overlapping ranges in relation to the mid frequency between the two neighb...

Page 300: ...tuation overlapping ranges Range 4 None Range 5 None overlap and cross the mid frequency between sub blocks 1 and 2 Result Subranges 4a and 5a are created left and right of the mid frequency For subrange 4a limit line and parameters of range 4 apply For subrange 5a limit line and parameters of range 5 apply Global SEM limit check For the complete SEM measurement which can consist of multiple sub b...

Page 301: ...global span are considered for the SEM measurement Multi SEM configuration In the Spectrum application application only spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels see SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks Multi SEM on page 297 Up to three sub blocks with two gaps can be defined For each sub block the familiar configuration settings concerning ranges limit lines etc can be define...

Page 302: ... swept individually and for which different limitations apply You configure the indi vidual frequency ranges and mask limits in the Sweep List If you edit the sweep list always follow the rules and consider the limitations described in Ranges and Range Settings on page 291 Range Start Range Stop 303 Fast SEM 303 Filter Type 303 RBW 303 VBW 304 Sweep Time Mode 304 Sweep Time 304 Ref Level 304 RF At...

Page 303: ... mum span of the reference range see Channel Power Settings on page 309 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range FREQuency STARt on page 568 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range FREQuency STOP on page 568 Fast SEM Activates Fast SEM mode for all ranges in the sweep list For details see Fast SEM Measurements on page 296 Note If you deactivate Fast SEM mode while Symmetrical Setup mode is on Symmetri...

Page 304: ...he range For details on the sweep time see Chapter 7 6 1 7 How Long the Data is Measured Sweep Time on page 394 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range SWEep TIME on page 577 Ref Level Sets the reference level for the range For details on the reference level see Chapter 7 5 1 1 Reference Level on page 382 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range RLEVel on page 577 RF Att Mode Activates ...

Page 305: ...checks see Limit Lines in SEM Measurements on page 294 The limit state affects the availability of all limit settings Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass STATe on page 575 CALCulate n LIMit k FAIL on page 782 Abs Limit Start Stop n Sets an absolute limit value for the n th power class at the start or stop frequency of the range dBm Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ran...

Page 306: ...t ABS on page 572 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STOP ABS on page 574 Multi Limit Calc n Defines the function used to calculate the limit line for the n th power class for overlap ping ranges in Multi SEM measurements For details see Limit calculation for individ ual ranges on page 299 NONE reference ranges only the limit of the reference range is used SUM Sum of the two limi...

Page 307: ...n particular this means Inserting ranges a symmetrical range is inserted on the other side of the reference range Deleting ranges the symmetrical range on the other side of the reference range is also deleted Editing range settings the settings in the symmetrical range are adapted accord ingly Note If Fast SEM mode is deactivated while Symmetrical Setup mode is on Sym Setup mode is automatically a...

Page 308: ...ing corresponds to the global set ting in the Frequency settings see Center Frequency Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb SCENter on page 564 Standard Defines the use of a standard settings file for a particular sub block For details see Standard Files on page 311 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet STANdard on page 562 Edit Sweep List Switches to the Sweep List tab of the Spectrum Emission Mas...

Page 309: ...hod Peak Power Determines the peak power within the reference range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RTYPe on page 580 Channel Power Settings If the Power Reference Type Channel Power was selected additional parameters can be configured Tx Bandwidth Channel Power Settings Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power with Minimum span Tx Bandwidth of reference range Remote command SE...

Page 310: ...r Class 311 Used Power Classes Defines which power classes are considered for the SEM measurement Limits can be defined only for used power classes It is only possible to select either one specific power class or all the defined power classes If All is selected the power class that corresponds to the currently measured power in the reference range is used for monitoring The limits assigned to that...

Page 311: ...Mit k ESPectrum sb PCLass PClass MAXimum on page 584 Sweep List Switches to the Sweep List tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box and focuses the Limit Check setting for the corresponding power class 1 4 in the refer ence range see Limit Check n on page 305 Adding or Removing a Power Class Adds a new power class at the end of the list or removes the last power class After adding or removing ...

Page 312: ... Files 312 File Name 312 Load Standard 313 Save Standard 313 Delete Standard 313 Restore Standard Files 313 Selecting Storage Location Drive Path Files Select the storage location of the file on the instrument or an external drive The default storage location for the SEM settings files is C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL sem_std Remote command MMEMory CATalog on page 786 File Name Contains the ...

Page 313: ...toring predefined standard files The standards predefined by Rohde Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the Restore Standard Files function see Restore Standard Files on page 313 Restore Standard Files Restores the standards predefined by Rohde Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery The XML files from the C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL sem_backup folder are copi...

Page 314: ... Margin Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check you can define a margin or threshold for the peak values to be displayed in the result summary Only peaks that exceed the margin value are displayed also in the diagram if activated Remote command CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch MARGin on page 586 Saving the Result Summary Evaluation List to a File Exports the Result Sum...

Page 315: ...er 8 6 6 10 Example SEM Measurement on page 587 To select an SEM measurement Press the MEAS key then select the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement To perform an SEM measurement according to a standard Load the settings file as described in How to load an SEM settings file on page 317 and start a measurement To configure a user defined SEM measurement 1 Define the span of the signal you want to mon...

Page 316: ...s for each range as required If symmetrical setup is activated you only have to configure the ranges to one side of the center range In particular define the limits for each range of the signal i e the area in which the signal level can deviate without failing the limit check If several power classes were defined see step 3 define limits for each power class a Define the type of limit check i e wh...

Page 317: ... Emission Mask configuration dialog Define a function to be used for overlapping ranges in the Multi Limit Calc field of the sweep list 6 Start a sweep The determined powers and limit deviations for each sub block each gap and each range are indicated in the Result Summary If activated the peak power lev els for each range are also indicated in the Spectrum diagram 7 To save the Result Summary exp...

Page 318: ... settings file is removed from the R S FPL1000 How to restore default SEM settings files The R S FPL1000 is delivered with predefined settings files which can be edited and overwritten However you can restore the original files In the Standard Files tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box select the Restore Standard Files button The original predefined settings files are available for selecti...

Page 319: ...ultiple sub blocks A programming example demonstrating a SEM measurement in a remote environment is provided in Chapter 8 6 6 10 Example SEM Measurement on page 587 Test setup Signal generator settings e g R S FPL1000 SMW Device Standard Center frequency Level Test model SigGen 1 3GPP FDD 900 MHz 0 dBm 1 16 SigGen 2 EUTRA LTE 906 5 MHz 0 dBm 1_1_5MHz Setting up the measurement 1 Preset the R S FPL...

Page 320: ...h Figure 7 28 Multi SEM measurement results of the measurement for each sub block 7 2 6 8 Reference SEM File Descriptions This reference provides details on the format of the SEM settings and result files Format Description of SEM XML Files 320 ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask 326 Format Description of SEM XML Files The SEM XML files offer a quick way to change the measurement setti...

Page 321: ...ile consists of three elements that can be defined The BaseFormat element The PowerClass element The Range element The BaseFormat element It carries information about basic settings In this element only the ReferencePower child node has any effects on the measurement itself The other attributes and child nodes are used to display information about the Spectrum Emission Mask standard on the measure...

Page 322: ...ata Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL sem_std directory or check the struc ture as shown below Below a basic example of the structure of the file is shown containing all mandatory attributes and child nodes Note that the PowerClass element and the Range element are themselves elements of the BaseFormat element They must be inserted where noted They are separated here simply to provide a better overview Also n...

Page 323: ...Limit RBW Bandwidth Bandwidth Type FilterType VBW Bandwidth Bandwidth Detector Detector Detector Sweep Mode SweepMode Time SweepTime Amplitude ReferenceLevel Unit dBm Value Value RFAttenuation Mode Auto Unit dB Value Value Preamplifier State State Amplitude MeasPointsMin 1 MeasPointsMin CalcRuleMulti Sum CalcRuleMulti Range Table 7 13 Attributes and child nodes of the BaseFormat element Child Node...

Page 324: ...ange is 200 Yes Unit dBm Yes InclusiveFlag true Yes StopPower Value power in dBm The stop power must be equal to the start power of the next power class The StopPower value of the last range is 200 Yes Unit dBm InclusiveFlag false Yes DefaultLimitFailMode Absolute Relative Absolute and Rel ative Absolute or Relative Yes Table 7 15 Attributes and child nodes of the Range element normal ranges Child...

Page 325: ...t nodes one of the limit nodes has to have a relative unit e g dBc the other one must have an absolute unit e g dBm Yes Start Value numeric_value Power limit at start fre quency Yes Unit dBm Hz dBm dBc dBr dB Sets the unit of the start value Stop Value numeric_value Power limit at stop fre quency Unit dBm Hz dBm dBc dBr dB Sets the unit of the stop value LimitFailMode Absolute Relative Absolute an...

Page 326: ...SEM measurement is exported the data is stored in ASCII format as described below The first part of the file lists information about the signal analyzer and the general setup File contents Explanation File header Type FPL1003 Model Version 1 00 Firmware version Date 31 Mar 17 Storage date of data set Mode ANALYZER SEM Operating mode and measurement function Center Freq 13250000000 000000 Hz X axis...

Page 327: ... dB positive value means above the limit limit fail pass 0 fail 1 2 2515000 12750000 30000 13257632500 43 8447 22747802734 0 33028793334960938 49 66971206 6650391 FAIL 7 2 7 Spurious Emissions Measurement Spurious Emissions measurements monitor unwanted RF products outside the assigned frequency band generated by an amplifier About the Measurement 327 Spurious Emissions Measurement Results 328 Spu...

Page 328: ...an be displayed to evaluate the measured powers and limit check results see also Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements on page 330 The details of the evaluation list can be configured The following information is provided in the evaluation list for each range Column Description Range Low Frequency range start for the range the peak value belongs to Range Up Frequency range end for the range the pea...

Page 329: ...nowledge on basic terms and principles used in Spurious Emis sions measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required config uration settings Ranges and Range Settings 329 Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements 330 Ranges and Range Settings Conditions for ranges The following rules apply to ranges The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz The individual ranges must not overlap but c...

Page 330: ...Sweep List and it is strongly recommended that you use only this limit line definition In the Sweep List you can define a limit line that varies its level according to the specified frequency ranges A distinguished limit line is automatically defined according to the current Sweep List settings every time the settings change This limit line is labeled _SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS_ xxx where xxx is an index ...

Page 331: ...y peaks per range are listed For details see List Evaluation on page 335 7 2 7 4 Spurious Emissions Measurement Configuration Access Overview Select Measurement Spurious Emissions The spurious emissions measurement is started immediately with the default settings The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chapter 8 6 7 Measuring Spurious Emissions on page 590 Sweep List 3...

Page 332: ...rt Abs Limit Stop 335 Insert before Range Insert after Range 335 Delete Range 335 Range Start Range Stop Sets the start frequency stop frequency of the selected range You can define a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges In this case the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe range F...

Page 333: ...nge BANDwidth VIDeo on page 592 Sweep Time Mode Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time For details on the sweep time mode see Chapter 7 6 1 7 How Long the Data is Mea sured Sweep Time on page 394 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe range SWEep TIME AUTO on page 597 Sweep Time Sets the sweep time value for the range For details on the sweep time see Chapter 7 6 1 7 How Long the Data ...

Page 334: ...ints for the specified range For details on sweep points see Chapter 7 6 1 8 How Much Data is Measured Sweep Points and Sweep Count on page 395 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe range POINts VALue on page 596 Stop After Sweep This function is not available for the R S FPL1000 Transducer Sets a transducer for the specified range You can only choose a transducer that fulfills the following conditions ...

Page 335: ...e currently focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly The maximum number of ranges is 30 Delete Range Deletes the currently focused range The range numbers are updated accordingly Adjusting the X Axis to the Range Definitions Access Overview Select Measurement Spurious Emissions Adjust X Axis The frequency axis of the measurement diagram can be adjusted automatically so that th...

Page 336: ...aks that have been detected during an active list evaluation are marked with blue squares in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch PSHow on page 586 Margin A margin functionality is not available for the limit check However you can define a margin threshold for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list Only peaks that exceed the margin value are displayed also in...

Page 337: ...you select the Save function For details see How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List on page 338 Remote command MMEMory STORe n LIST on page 812 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 786 7 2 7 5 How to Perform a Spurious Emissions Measurement The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform spurious emis sions measurements For remote operation see Chapter 8 6 7 6 Programmi...

Page 338: ...evels for each range are also indicated in the diagram 9 To save the evaluation list export the results to a file as described in How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List on page 338 How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List The evaluation list from a Spurious Emissions measurement can be saved to a file which can be exported to another application for further analysis for examp...

Page 339: ...nd measurement function Center Freq 13250000000 000000 Hz X axis settings Freq Offset 0 000000 Hz Span 26499982000 000000 Hz x Axis LIN Start 9000 000000 Hz Stop 8000000000 000000 Hz Level Offset 0 000000 dB Y axis settings Ref Position 100 000000 y Axis LOG Level Range 100 000000 dB Trace settings Trace Mode CLR WRITE Sweep Count 1 TRACE 1 Trace Mode CLR WRITE x Unit Hz y Unit dBm List evaluation...

Page 340: ... Measurement 340 Time Domain Power Results 340 Time Domain Power Basics Range Definition Using Limit Lines 341 Time Domain Power Configuration 342 How to Measure Powers in the Time Domain 343 Measurement Example 343 7 2 8 1 About the Measurement Using the Time Domain Power measurement function the R S FPL1000 determines the power of the signal in zero span by summing up the power at the individual...

Page 341: ...uring the Time Domain Power on page 602 7 2 8 3 Time Domain Power Basics Range Definition Using Limit Lines The range of the measured signal to be evaluated for the power measurement can be restricted using limit lines The left and right limit lines S1 S2 define the evaluation range and are indicated by vertical red lines in the diagram If activated the power results are only calculated from the l...

Page 342: ...tomatically switched on at the same time Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak STATe on page 605 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak RESult on page 608 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS STATe on page 605 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS RESult on page 609 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN STATe on page 604 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary...

Page 343: ... by selecting the corresponding softkeys 3 To restrict the power evaluation range define limits a Select the Time Dom Power Config softkey to display the Time Domain Power configuration dialog box b Switch on the limits by setting the Limit State to On The limit lines S1 and S2 are displayed c Define the left limit limit line S1 the right limit S2 or both 4 Start a sweep The measured powers are di...

Page 344: ...ll four results to On 9 Set the Limit State to On 10 Define the left limit at 326 μs and the right limit at 538 μs This range corresponds to the useful part of the GSM burst The mean power of the useful part of the GSM burst is calculated to be 13 dBm 7 2 9 Harmonic Distortion Measurement The Harmonic Distortion measurement measures harmonics and their distortion including the total harmonic disto...

Page 345: ...e generated by nonlinear characteristics which add frequencies to a pure sinewave They can often be reduced by low pass filters Since the signal analyzer itself has a nonlinear characteristic for example in its first mixer measures must be taken to ensure that harmonics produced in the signal analyzer do not cause spurious results If necessary the fundamental wave must be attenuated selectively wi...

Page 346: ...rmonic intercept PI mixer level dBm The mixer level is the RF level applied to the RF input minus the set RF attenuation The formula for the internally generated level P1 at the 2nd harmonic in dBm is P1 2 PI S H I 2 The lower measurement limit for the harmonic is the noise floor of the signal analyzer The harmonic of the measured DUT should if sufficiently averaged by means of a video filter be a...

Page 347: ...lost in noise If both the DUT and the signal analyzer contribute to the har monic the reduction in the harmonic level is correspondingly smaller High sensitivity harmonics measurements If harmonics have very small levels the resolution bandwidth required to measure them must be reduced considerably The sweep time is therefore also increased con siderably In this case the measurement of individual ...

Page 348: ...ower Remote commands The results can also be queried using remote commands The first harmonic frequency can be read out via the general center frequency com mand SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 642 THD CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion on page 614 List of harmonics CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics LIST on page 615 7 2 9 4 Harmonic Distortion Configuration Access Overview Sel...

Page 349: ...quency This setting is identical to the normal sweep time for zero span see also Sweep Time on page 398 Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 656 Harmonic RBW Auto Enables disables the automatic adjustment of the resolution bandwidth for Normal 3dB Gaussian filter types The automatic adjustment is carried out according to RBWn RBW1 n If RBWn is not available the next higher value is used Re...

Page 350: ...ialog box 2 Define the number of harmonics to be determined using the Number of Harmon ics softkey 3 Perform a sweep The trace for the determined harmonics are displayed in the diagram separated by red display lines The measured power for each harmonic in relation to the funda mental is indicated in the result table 4 If the signal changes significantly during or after the harmonics measurement us...

Page 351: ... to measure the third order intercept point TOI a two tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the R S FPL1000 input Marker 1 and marker 2 both nor mal markers are set to the maximum of the two signals Marker 3 and marker 4 are placed on the intermodulation products The R S FPL1000 calculates the third order intercept point from the level difference between the first 2 markers and the ...

Page 352: ...ted by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal PU1 and signal PU2 fi1 2 fu1 fu2 1 fi2 2 fu2 fu1 2 Dependency on level of useful signals The level of the intermodulation products depends on the level of the useful signals If the two useful signals are increased by 1 dB the level of the intermodulation products increases by 3 dB which means that the spacing aD3 between intermodulation signals and u...

Page 353: ...intermodulation products of the third order increase three times as quickly as the useful signals The intercept point is the fictitious level where the two lines intersect It cannot be measured directly since the useful level is previously limited by the maximum two port output power Calculation method However the intercept point can be calculated from the known line slopes and the measured spacin...

Page 354: ...le to obtain the range that is required Since phase noise decreases as the carrier offset increases its influence decreases with increasing fre quency offset from the useful signals The following diagrams illustrate the intermodulation free dynamic range as a function of the selected bandwidth and of the level at the input mixer signal level set RF attenuation at different useful signal offsets Fi...

Page 355: ... to measure the levels of the useful signals and those of the intermodulation products sep arately using a small span The measurement time will be reduced in particular if the offset of the useful signals is large To find signals reliably when frequency span is small it is best to synchronize the signal sources and the R S FPL1000 7 2 10 3 TOI Results As a result of the TOI measurement the followi...

Page 356: ...e n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult on page 617 7 2 10 4 TOI Configuration Access Overview Select Measurement Third Order Intercept TOI Config The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 8 6 10 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point on page 616 Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 4 357 Search Signals 357 Measurements and Results ...

Page 357: ... Intercept The precise TOI for the R S FPL1000 in relation to the input signals is provided in the data sheet For remote operation see Chapter 8 6 10 2 Programming Example Measuring the TOI on page 617 1 Apply a two tone signal with equal carrier levels to the R S FPL1000 input 2 On the R S FPL1000 press the MEAS key 3 Select the Third Order Intercept measurement function from the Select Measure m...

Page 358: ...e noise is reduced the trace is smoothed further and the intermodulation prod ucts can be seen clearly 5 Set the VBW to 1 kHz Measuring intermodulation using the Third Order Intercept TOI measurement function 1 Press the MEAS key and select the Third Order Intercept measurement function from the Select Measurement dialog box The R S FPL1000 activates four markers to measure the intermodulation dis...

Page 359: ...gnals at the input mixer When the RF attenuation is added the mixer level is reduced and the intermodulation distance is increased With an additional RF attenuation of 10 dB the levels of the intermodulation products are reduced by 20 dB The noise level is however increased by 10 dB Increase the RF attenuation to 20 dB to reduce intermodulation products The R S FPL1000 s intrinsic intermodulation ...

Page 360: ...rement is activated marker 1 is set to the peak level which is consid ered to be the carrier level Delta markers 2 and 3 are automatically set symmetrically to the carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace The markers can be adjusted manually if necessary The R S FPL1000 calculates the power at the marker positions from the measured levels The AM modulation depth is calculated as the ratio ...

Page 361: ... Modulation Depth Configuration Access Overview Select Measurement AM Modulation Depth AM Mod Depth Config The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 8 6 11 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth on page 618 Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 361 Search Signals 362 Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Indicates the detected characteristic values as determined by the AM Modulation Depth...

Page 362: ...e n MARKer m X on page 714 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X on page 712 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X RELative on page 726 Search Signals Performs a new search on the input signal and recalculates the AM Modulation Depth according to the measured values Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth SEARchsignal ONCE on page 619 7 2 11 4 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement If the results ...

Page 363: ...ed AM Modulation Depth is indicated in the marker information The markers required for calculation are displayed in the marker table 4 If the signal changes significantly during or after the AM Modulation Depth mea surement use the Search Signals function to start a new peak search automati cally and restart the calculation of the AM Modulation Depth 7 3 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Out...

Page 364: ...uation PROTection RESet Radio Frequency State 364 Impedance 364 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 670 Impedance For some measurements the reference impedance for the measured levels of the R S FPL can be set to 50 Ω or 75 Ω Select 75 Ω if the 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Ω adapter of the RAZ...

Page 365: ...everal applications The power sensor cannot be used from the R S FPL1000 firmware and the R S Power Viewer Plus virtual power meter for displaying results of the R S NRP power sensors simultaneously Result display The results of the power sensor measurements are displayed in the marker table For each power sensor a row is inserted The sensor index is indicated in the Type col umn Using a Power Sen...

Page 366: ...vided as usual The Gate Mode Level is not supported for R S power sensors The signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded rather than a time period However only time periods can be used for gating in level mode Thus the trig ger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement the measurement cannot be completed For details on gatin...

Page 367: ...e Count Number of Readings 370 Duty Cycle 370 Using the power sensor as an external trigger 370 External Trigger Level 370 Hysteresis 370 Trigger Holdoff 371 Drop Out Time 371 Slope 371 State Switches the power measurement for all power sensors on or off Note that in addition to this general setting each power sensor can be activated or deactivated individually by the Select setting on each tab Ho...

Page 368: ...ting for the selected power sensor index By default serial numbers not yet assigned are automatically assigned to the next free power sensor index for which Auto Assignment is selected Alternatively you can assign the sensors manually by deactivating the Auto option and selecting a serial number from the list Remote command SENSe PMETer p STATe on page 678 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p DEFin...

Page 369: ...th lower power or modulated signals Long Signals at the lower end of the measurement range 50 dBm or Signals with lower power to minimize the influence of noise Manual Manual averaging mode The average count is set with the Average Count Number of Readings setting Remote command SENSe PMETer p MTIMe on page 676 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STATe on page 677 Setting the Reference Level from the Mea...

Page 370: ...Cle STATe on page 675 SENSe PMETer p DCYCle VALue on page 675 Using the power sensor as an external trigger If activated the power sensor creates a trigger signal when a power higher than the defined External Trigger Level is measured This trigger signal can be used as an external power trigger by the R S FPL1000 This setting is only available in conjunction with a compatible power sensor For deta...

Page 371: ...nds required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 8 8 5 2 Working with Power Sensors on page 671 Power sensors can also be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level e g from a signal generator This is described in How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External PSE Trigger on page 373 How to Set Up a Power Sensor Up to 4 external power sensors can be configured separately...

Page 372: ...nce value press the Meas Ref button b Alternatively enter a value manually in the Reference Value field c Optionally select the Use Ref Level Offset option to take the reference level offset set for the analyzer into account for the measured power 10 To use the power sensor as an external power trigger select the External Power Trigger option and define the trigger settings For details see How to ...

Page 373: ...e power sensor as described in How to Set Up a Power Sensor on page 371 3 In the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box select the External Power Trig ger option 4 Enter the power level at which a trigger signal is to be generated External Trigger Level and the other trigger settings for the power sensor trigger 5 Press the TRIG key and then select Trigger Gate Config 6 In the Trigger And Gate d...

Page 374: ...t is not available for frequency sweeps or I Q measure ments The video output is a signal of 1 V It can be used for example to control demodulated audio frequencies Remote command OUTPut IF SOURce on page 682 OUTPut IF IFFRequency on page 683 SYSTem SPEaker VOLume on page 684 SYSTem SPEaker STATe on page 684 Noise Source Control The R S FPL1000 provides a connector NOISE SOURCE CONTROL with a 28 V...

Page 375: ...he required configuration Defining the Scope of the Measurement Frequency Range 375 Stepping Through the Frequency Range Center Frequency Stepsize 375 7 4 1 1 Defining the Scope of the Measurement Frequency Range The frequency range defines the scope of the signal and spectrum to be analyzed It can either be defined as a span around a center frequency or as a range from a start to a stop frequency...

Page 376: ...ion to the selected span or resolution bandwidth for zero span measurements In some cases however it may be useful to set the step size to other values For example to analyze signal harmonics you can define the step size to be equal to the center frequency In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center fre quency of another harmonic Similarly you can define the step size to be equal ...

Page 377: ...Center Frequency Stepsize 378 Frequency Offset 379 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span 0 spanmin 2 fcenter fmax spanmin 2 zero span 0 Hz fcenter fmax fmax and spanmin depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 642 S...

Page 378: ...Zero Span Sets the span to 0 Hz zero span The x axis becomes the time axis with the grid lines corresponding to 1 10 of the current sweep time SWT For details see Chapter 7 2 1 Basic Measurements on page 233 Remote command FREQ SPAN 0Hz see SENSe FREQuency SPAN on page 644 Last Span Sets the span to the previous value With this function you can switch between an overview measurement and a detailed...

Page 379: ...ncy CENTer STEP on page 643 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it ...

Page 380: ...mote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion STRack STATe on page 648 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion STRack BANDwidth on page 649 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion STRack THReshold on page 649 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion STRack TRACe on page 649 7 4 4 How To Define the Frequency Range The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to configure the frequency and span settings For details on ind...

Page 381: ...alog box define the Center Frequency Stepsize This is the size by which the center frequency is to be increased or decreased in each step Enter a manual or relative value or set the step size to the current center fre quency or marker value To move from one harmonic to the next use the center frequency or marker value 2 Select the Center Frequency dialog field 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cent...

Page 382: ...he reference level determines the amplitude represented by the topmost grid line in the display When you change the reference level the measurement is not restarted the results are merely shifted in the display Only if the reference level changes due to a coupled RF attenuation see Attenuation Mode Value on page 386 the mea surement is restarted In general the R S FPL measures the signal voltage a...

Page 383: ... The level at the input mixer is determined by the set RF attenuation according to the formula levelmixer levelinput RF attenuation The maximum mixer level allowed is 13 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which is indi cated by the RF Overload status display Furthermore higher input levels may dam age the instrument Therefore the required RF attenuation is ...

Page 384: ... a logarithmic display smaller values are distributed among a much larger area of the display while large values are condensed to a smaller area Now it is much easier to distinguish several lower values as they are spread over a wider area Logarithmic scaling is useful when large ranges of values must be combined in one display Loga rithmic scaling is best applied to measurement values in logarith...

Page 385: ...S FPL is adapted according to this value it is recommen ded that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level Thus you ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio For details see Chapter 7 5 1 1 Reference Level on page 382 Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel on page 658 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines a...

Page 386: ...MPedance on page 670 CALCulate n UNIT POWer on page 657 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R S FPL for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression and clip ping are minimized To...

Page 387: ...els of the R S FPL can be set to 50 Ω or 75 Ω Select 75 Ω if the 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Ω adapter of the RAZ type That corresponds to 25Ω in series to the input impe dance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 75Ω 50Ω This value also affects the unit conversion see Reference Level on page 385 Remote command INPut IMPedan...

Page 388: ...diagram For spectrograms this value defines the position of the reference level value within the span covered by the color map In this case the value is given in where 0 corre sponds to the maximum right end and 100 to the minimum left end of the color map Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition on page 661 Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference ...

Page 389: ...o Optimize the Amplitude Display This section gives you some advice on how to optimize the display of the measured signal amplitudes depending on the required evaluation 1 Perform a measurement with the default settings to get an impression of the values to be expected 2 Use the Auto Level function AUTO menu to optimize the reference level 3 Use the AF Auto Scale function AUTO menu to optimize the...

Page 390: ...efault cou pling is used Thus the following settings are applied RBW 100 Span VBW RBW 100 Span Sweep Time Tmin for set Span RBW VBW When defining the bandwidth and filter settings consider the impact of the individual settings on the other settings and the measurement result as described in more detail in the following sections Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth 39...

Page 391: ...alyzers is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to the 3 dB bandwidth shape factor For the R S FPL1000 the shape factor for bandwidths is 5 i e the 60 dB bandwidth of the 30 kHz filter is 150 kHz The higher spectral resolution with smaller bandwidths is won by longer Sweep Time s for the same span The Sweep Time has to allow the resolution filters to settle dur ing a sweep at all signal levels and fre...

Page 392: ... bandwidths reduce the signal noise ratio Table 7 16 Overview of RBW VBW ratios and recommendations for use Ratio RBW VBW Recommendation for use 1 1 Recommended for sinusoidal signals This is the default setting for automatic coupling 0 1 Recommended when the amplitudes of pulsed signals are to be measured correctly The IF filter is exclusively responsible for the pulse shape No additional evaluat...

Page 393: ... range and also allow you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level With a wide partial span the carrier and the useful signal are likely to be measured at the same time in which case the powers of both signals are summarized so the reference level must be high enough to consider this factor With a narrow partial span this is less likely to happen so the reference level...

Page 394: ...000 data sheet Channel filters Channel filters are fairly steep but require a long settling time they are useful for pulse measurements in the time domain 7 6 1 7 How Long the Data is Measured Sweep Time Each filter has a settling time that must be awaited in order to obtain correct results Since the resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth define the filter the smaller of the two determines the m...

Page 395: ...ils on how the number of sweep points and the sweep count affect the trace results on the screen see Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector on page 460 7 6 1 9 How Often Data is Measured Sweep Mode How often the spectrum is swept depends on the sweep mode Either a certain number of sweeps can be defined Sweep Count which are performed in Single Sweep mode or the sweep is repeated ...

Page 396: ...plication RF Measurements R S FPL1000 396 User Manual 1178 3370 02 03 Figure 7 36 Bandwidth dialog box for RF measurements Figure 7 37 Sweep dialog box for spectrogram display Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration ...

Page 397: ...ly a green bullet is displayed next to the RBW display in the channel bar For more information see Chapter 7 6 1 1 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appro priate Resolution Bandwidth on page 390 For measurements on I Q data in the frequency domain the maximum RBW is 1 MHz Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution on page 650 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution AUTO on page 651 VBW Defines the video bandwi...

Page 398: ...cally adjusted Manual For manual mode define the Sweep Time Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible Sweep Time Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 656 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 656 SENSe SWEep DURation on page 654 Span RBW Sets the coupling ratio if RBW is set to auto mode F...

Page 399: ... state Auto In addition the ratio RBW VBW is set to Sine 1 1 and the ratio Span RBW to 100 For more information see Chapter 7 6 1 3 Coupling VBW and RBW on page 392 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution AUTO on page 651 SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO on page 652 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 656 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0...

Page 400: ... but it can be optimized according to measure ment requirements Table 7 17 Optimization parameters in FFT mode Optimization mode Description Dynamic Optimizes the dynamic range by using the narrowest possible partial span depend ing on the RBW The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is activated to obtain the best control range for the A D converter Speed Optimizes the sweep ra...

Page 401: ... Sequencer activates that channel setup and only for a channel defined sequence In this case the Sequencer sweeps a channel setup in single sweep mode only once Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed channel setup is updated For details on the ...

Page 402: ... Selects a specific frame loads the corresponding trace from the memory and displays it in the Spectrum window Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automati cally selects the frame that belongs to that marker This function is only available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped and only if a spectrogram is selected The most recent frame is number 0 ...

Page 403: ...CALCulate n SPECtrogram CLEar IMMediate on page 694 7 6 3 Reference List of Available RRC and Channel Filters For power measurement a number of especially steep edged channel filters are availa ble see the following table The indicated filter bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth For RRC filters the fixed roll off factor a is also indicated The available Gaussian 3 dB sweep filters are listed in the R S...

Page 404: ...r ETS300 113 25 kHz channels 18 kHz a 0 35 RRC TETRA 20 kHz CFILter 21 kHz CFILter PDC 24 3 kHz a 0 35 RRC IS 136 25 kHz CFILter APCO 25 P2 30 kHz CFILter CDPD CDMAone 50 kHz CFILter 100 kHz CFILter 150 kHz CFILter FM Radio 192 kHz CFILter PHS 200 kHz CFILter GSM 300 kHz CFILter 500 kHz CFILter J 83 8 VSB DVB USA RF ID 14333 1 MHz CFILter CDMAone 1 228 MHz CFILter CDMAone 1 28 MHz a 0 22 RRC TD SC...

Page 405: ...he sweep is started immediately How ever sometimes you want the measurement to start only when a specific condition is fulfilled for example a signal level is exceeded or in certain time intervals For these cases you can define a trigger for the measurement In FFT sweep mode the trigger defines when the data acquisition starts for the FFT conversion An Offset can be defined to delay the measuremen...

Page 406: ...UT connectors on the instrument For details on the available trigger sources see Trigger Source on page 410 Trigger Offset An offset can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event or to include data before the actual trigger event in time domain measurements pre trigger offset Pre trigger offsets are possible because the R S FPL1000 captures data continuously in the time domain ev...

Page 407: ...e second time Trigger level T T T Trigger hysteresis T Figure 7 38 Effects of the trigger hysteresis See Hysteresis on page 412 Trigger Drop Out Time If a modulated signal is instable and produces occasional drop outs during a burst you can define a minimum duration that the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again This is called the drop out time Defining a dropout t...

Page 408: ...ast for the duration of the drop out time as defined above However if a drop out time is defined that is longer than the pulse width this condition cannot be met before the final pulse so a trigger event will not occur until the pulsed signal is over Drop Out T T T Figure 7 40 Trigger drop out time for falling edge trigger For gated measurements a combination of a falling edge trigger and a drop o...

Page 409: ...Preview 409 Frequency 410 RBW 410 Sweep Time 410 Trigger Source 410 Free Run 410 External Trigger 1 411 Video 411 IF Power 411 Time 411 Trigger Level 411 Repetition Interval 412 Drop Out Time 412 Trigger Offset 412 Hysteresis 412 Trigger Holdoff 412 Slope 413 Preview The preview mode allows you to try out trigger and gate settings before actually apply ing them to the current measurement The previ...

Page 410: ...rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution on page 650 Sweep Time Preview Defines the sweep time Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 656 Trigger Source Selects the trigger source If a tri...

Page 411: ...gger Source The R S FPL1000 starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type This trigger source is only available for RF input The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A...

Page 412: ...rmation see Trigger Offset on page 406 Offset 0 Start of the sweep is delayed Offset 0 Sweep starts earlier pretrigger Only possible for zero span e g I Q Analyzer application and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time Pretriggermax sweep timemax For the Time trigger source this function is not available Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 663 H...

Page 413: ...e relevant part of the signal is displayed for example a complete burst 3 Determine the parameters you want to use to define the trigger and gate conditions from the preview diagram for example the length of a burst or slot the upper or lower power level of a pulse the maximum noise level the power level or time at which a certain incident occurs 4 Try out different trigger and gate settings as de...

Page 414: ...old before the next level crossing triggers a new measure ment 6 To skip multiple triggers in a burst define a Holdoff time that must pass between two triggers The holdoff time should be slightly larger than the burst 7 7 2 Gating Gated Measurements 414 Gate Settings 417 How to Configure a Gated Measurement 418 7 7 2 1 Gated Measurements Like a gate provides an opening in a fence a gated measureme...

Page 415: ...FPL1000 415 User Manual 1178 3370 02 03 Additionally a delay time can be defined so that the first few measurement points after the gate opening are ignored Figure 7 42 Effects of Gate mode Gate delay and Gate length Trigger and Gate Configuration ...

Page 416: ...requency components generated during switching Similarly the spectrum can also be analyzed for an inactive carrier The sweep can be controlled by an external gate or by the internal power trigger Figure 7 43 GSM signal with GATE OFF Figure 7 44 GSM signal with GATE ON Gated sweep operation is also possible for zero span measurements This allows you to display level variations of individual slots f...

Page 417: ...ger event for the gate to open is the detection of the signal edge After the gate signal has been detected the gate remains open until the gate length is over Level The trigger event for the gate to open is a particular power level After the gate signal has been detected the gate remains open until the signal disappears Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigge...

Page 418: ...ent 1 Determine the required parameters as described in Chapter 7 7 1 3 How to Deter mine the Required Trigger Gate Parameters on page 413 2 The gate is opened by a trigger event which must be based on a power source Define the trigger as described in Chapter 7 7 1 4 How to Configure a Triggered Measurement on page 413 As the Trigger Source use IF Power Video or External 3 Define how long the gate...

Page 419: ...aiting for a trigger The trigger source is temporarily set to Free Run After the measurement is com pleted the original trigger source is restored The trigger level is adjusted as fol lows For IF Power and RF Power triggers Trigger Level Reference Level 15 dB For Video trigger Trigger Level 85 Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIGger on page 647 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatical...

Page 420: ...ble value before an overload occurs then decrease the reference level in the same way You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 420 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 648 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the defa...

Page 421: ...you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at the same time Each marker can be assigned to a different frame Therefore in addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new marker If no frame number is specified the marker is positioned on the currently selected frame All markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame Basics on Markers 421 Marker S...

Page 422: ...ys or via the context menu Tap the marker on the touch screen and hold your finger for about 2 seconds until the context menu is opened then select the required entry Softkeys for active markers displayed on the screen are highlighted blue The softkey for the currently selected marker for which functions are performed is highlighted orange To set individual markers very quickly use the softkeys in...

Page 423: ...marker If several traces are displayed the marker is set to the maximum value of the trace which has the lowest number and is not frozen View mode The next marker to be activated is set to the frequency of the next lower level next peak as a delta marker its value is indicated as an offset to marker 1 A marker can only be activated when at least one trace in the corresponding window is visible If ...

Page 424: ...marker information displayed within the diagram area a separate marker table may be displayed beneath the diagram This table provides the following information for all active markers Type Marker type N normal D delta T temporary internal and number Ref Reference marker for delta markers Trc Trace to which the marker is assigned Frame Spectrogram frame the marker is positioned in Displayed only whe...

Page 425: ... defined as delta markers with reference to the first marker All markers are assigned to trace 1 but only the first marker is active Selected Marker 425 Marker State 425 Marker Position X value 426 Frame Spectrogram only 426 Marker Type 426 Reference Marker 426 Linking to Another Marker 427 Assigning the Marker to a Trace 427 Select Marker 427 All Marker Off 428 Selected Marker Marker name The mar...

Page 426: ...ot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker ...

Page 427: ...te n DELTamarker m LINK TO MARKer m on page 710 CALCulate n DELTamarker m LINK on page 709 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value o...

Page 428: ...Defining a Fixed Reference 429 Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off No separate marker table is displayed If Marker Info is active the marker information is displayed within the diagram area Auto Default If more than two markers are active the marker table is dis played automati...

Page 429: ...be defined for trace analysis Note that this function may not be available in all result displays For State On a vertical and a horizontal red display line are displayed marked as FXD The normal marker 1 is activated and set to the peak value of the trace assigned to marker 1 and a delta marker to the next peak The fixed reference marker is set to the position of marker 1 at the peak value The del...

Page 430: ...hing for signal peaks see Chapter 7 9 4 8 Marker Peak List on page 453 The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 8 8 8 4 Positioning the Marker on page 719 Marker Search Settings 430 Marker Search Settings for Spectrograms 432 Positioning Functions 436 7 9 3 1 Marker Search Settings Access MKR TO Search Config Markers are commonly used to determine peak values...

Page 431: ... the first local oscillator to the first inter mediate frequency at the input mixer the LO is represented as a sig nal at 0 Hz To avoid the peak marker jumping to the LO signal at 0 Hz this frequency is excluded from the peak search Off No restriction to the search range The frequency 0 Hz is included in the marker search functions Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m LOEXclude on page 716 Peak Exc...

Page 432: ...lute threshold as an additional condition for the peak search Only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected Remote command CALCulate n THReshold on page 718 Use Zoom Limits Search Limits If activated the peak search is restricted to the active zoom area defined for a single zoom Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits ZOOM STATe on page 718 Deactivating All Search Limits Search Limits De...

Page 433: ...ting All Search Limits 436 Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction Selects the search mode for the next peak search within the currently selected frame Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command Chap...

Page 434: ...MINimum ABOVe on page 737 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow on page 732 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow on page 737 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT on page 732 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT on page 737 Marker Search Type Defines the type of search to be performed in the spectrogram X Search Searches only within the current...

Page 435: ...on page 453 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m PEXCursion on page 716 Auto Max Peak Search Auto Min Peak Search If activated a maximum or minimum peak search is performed automatically for marker 1 after each sweep For spectrogram displays define which frame the peak is to be searched in Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum AUTO on page 719 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum AUTO on page 721 Sea...

Page 436: ... 437 Center Frequency Marker Frequency 437 Reference Level Marker Level 437 Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated For spectrogram displays define which frame the peak is to be searched in Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 720 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 724 Search Next Pea...

Page 437: ...ate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 722 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT on page 721 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt on page 722 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 725 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum LEFT on page 724 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt on page 725 Center Frequency Marker Frequency Sets the center frequency to the selected marker or delta marker frequency A pe...

Page 438: ...t Marker Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions Select Marker Function Signal Count Signal Count Config Or MKR Select Marker Function Signal Count Signal Count Config A normal marker determines the position of the point on the trace and indicates the sig nal frequency at this position The trace however contains only a limited number of points Depending on the selected span each trace point can ...

Page 439: ...he Signal Frequency Using the Signal Counter on page 237 Signal counters are not available for measurements on I Q based data Remote commands CALCulate n MARKer m COUNt on page 754 CALCulate n MARKer m COUNt RESolution on page 755 Signal Count Marker State 439 Resolution 439 Signal Count Marker State Activates or deactivates the special signal count marker function When activated the sweep stops a...

Page 440: ...In the default setting the R S FPL1000 uses the sample detector for the noise function With the sample detector you can set the trace to Average mode to sta bilize the measured values When the RMS detector is used trace averaging pro duces noise levels that are too low and cannot be corrected Instead increase the sweep time to obtain stable measurement results Correction factors The R S FPL1000 us...

Page 441: ...ing 174 to the result The individual marker settings correspond to those defined in the Marker dialog box see Chapter 7 9 2 1 Individual Marker Setup on page 425 Any settings to the marker state or type changed in the Marker Function dialog box are also changed in the Marker dialog box and vice versa Remote commands CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NOISe STATe on page 744 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtio...

Page 442: ...eci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 713 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe on page 711 Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates noise measurement for the marker in the diagram This function is only available for normal markers If activated the marker displays the noise power density measured at the position of the marker For details ...

Page 443: ...e during a phase noise measurement The delta marker 2 which shows the phase noise measurement result keeps the delta frequency value Therefore the phase noise measurement leads to reliable results in a certain offset although the source is drifting Only if the marker 2 reaches the border of the span the delta marker value is adjusted to be within the span In these cases select a larger span The re...

Page 444: ... 747 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise RESult on page 746 Phase Noise Measurement State 444 Defining Reference Point 445 Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off 445 Phase Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates phase noise measurement for the reference point in the dia gram This function is only available for delta markers Marker Usage ...

Page 445: ...oise Measurements Off Deactivates phase noise measurement for all markers Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe on page 746 7 9 4 4 Measuring Characteristic Bandwidths n dB Down Marker Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions n dB down n dB Down Config Or MKR Select Marker Function n dB down n dB Down Config When characterizing the shape of a signal the bandwidth at a spe...

Page 446: ... 1 ndB Offset value n dB down ndB down Bw PWid Determined bandwidth or pulse width zero span at the offset Q factor Quality factor of the determined bandwidth characteristic of damping or resonance T1 T2 Current position and level of the temporary markers If the required position for the temporary markers cannot be determined uniquely for example due to noise dashes are displayed as a result Remot...

Page 447: ... n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown TIME on page 753 7 9 4 5 Fixed Reference Marker Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions Reference Fixed Or MKR Select Marker Function Reference Fixed Instead of using a reference marker that may vary its position depending on the mea surement results a fixed reference marker can be defined for trace analysis Once positioned the reference marker does not move during s...

Page 448: ...lt 5 of the current span is used The span is indicated by limit lines in the diagram The results can be displayed either as a power dBm or density dBm Hz value and are indicated in the marker table for each band power marker Relative band power markers The results for band power markers which are defined as delta markers and thus have a reference value can also be calculated as reference power val...

Page 449: ... calculated again when it returns to the display All markers can be defined as band power markers each with a different span When a band power marker is activated if no marker is active yet marker 1 is activated Other wise the currently active marker is used as a band power marker all other marker functions for this marker are deactivated If the detector mode for the marker trace is set to Auto th...

Page 450: ...ndard frequency measurements not zero span in the Spectrum application If activated the markers display the power or density measured in the band around the current marker position For details see Chapter 7 9 4 6 Measuring the Power in a Channel Band Power Marker on page 448 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe on page 748 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe on pag...

Page 451: ...measurement for all markers Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe on page 748 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe on page 750 7 9 4 7 Demodulating Marker Values and Providing Audio Output Marker Demodulation Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions Select Marker Function Marker Demodulation Marker Demod Config Or MKR Select Marker Function Marker Demodulation Marke...

Page 452: ... Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation STATe on page 757 Continuous Demodulation If activated the signal is demodulated continuously not only at the marker position and sent to the audio output This allows you to monitor the frequency range acousti cally assuming the sweep time is long enough For zero span measurements demodulation is always active continuously Remote command C...

Page 453: ...e domain in Spectrum mode and in Analog Demodu lation mode This connector is only available if the R S FPL1 B5 option is installed Remote command SYSTem SPEaker VOLume on page 684 7 9 4 8 Marker Peak List Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions Marker Peak List Or MKR Select Marker Function Marker Peak List A common measurement task is to determine peak values i e maximum or minimum signal level...

Page 454: ... that is higher than the difference between the highest and the lowest value mea sured for the displayed inherent noise Effect of peak excursion settings example The following figure shows a trace to be analyzed Figure 7 46 Trace example The following table lists the peaks as indicated by the marker numbers in the diagram above as well as the minimum decrease in amplitude to either side of the pea...

Page 455: ...he peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application Remote commands CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks STATe on page 742 TRAC LIST see TRACe n DATA on page 703 Peak List State 455 Sort Mode 456 Maximum Number of Peaks 456 Peak Excursion 456 Display Marker Numbers 456 Export Peak List 456 Peak List State Activates deactivates the marker peak list If activated the p...

Page 456: ...e resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB For more information see Chapter 7 9 4 8 Marker Peak List on page 453 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m PEXCursion on page 716 Display Marker Numbers By default the marker numbers are indicated in the diagram so you can find the peaks from the list However for large numbers of peaks the marker numbers may decrease readabil...

Page 457: ...value to the center frequency Select the Center Mkr Freq softkey 4 Determine the precise frequency of the signal point a Select the Select Marker Function softkey b Select the Signal Count button c Select the Signal Count Resolution softkey d Select the resolution depending on how precise the result needs to be 7 9 5 2 How to Use a Fixed Reference Marker By default delta markers refer to marker 1 ...

Page 458: ... indicates the offset of the current trace value at the marker posi tion from the fixed reference value 7 9 6 Measurement Example Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Func tions This measurement example describes how to measure harmonics using the provided marker functions Note that this task can be performed much simpler using the Har monic Distortion measurement see Chapter 7 2 9 Harmonic Distortion...

Page 459: ...arker frequency 7 Move the center frequency to the 2nd harmonic of the signal by pressing the UP key The center frequency is set to the 2nd harmonic 8 Place the delta marker on the 2nd harmonic in the Marker To menu select the Peak softkey The delta marker moves to the maximum of the 2nd harmonic The displayed level result is relative to the reference point level fundamental wave level The other h...

Page 460: ... Assume the following measurement parameters Sample rate 32 MSamples s sweep points 1000 sweep time 100 ms Span 5 GHz During a single sweep 3 2 106 samples are collected and distributed to 1000 sweep points i e 3200 samples are collected per sweep point For each sweep point the measured data for a frequency span of 5 MHz span sweep points is analyzed Note that if you increase the number of sweep p...

Page 461: ...e power of the signal irrespective of the wave form CW carrier modulated carrier white noise or impulsive signal Correc tion factors as needed for other detectors to measure the power of the different signal classes are not required Average Av Calculates the linear average of all samples contained in a sweep point To this effect R S FPL1000 uses the linear voltage after envelope detection The samp...

Page 462: ...tor Normally if the RMS detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable traces Auto detector If the R S FPL1000 is set to define the appropriate detector automatically the detector is set depending on the selected trace mode Trace mode Detector Clear Write Auto Peak Max Hold Positive Peak Min Hold Negative Peak Average Sample Peak View Blank Analyzing Several Traces Trace Mo...

Page 463: ... recognized by its constant level This mode is not available for statistics measurements Average The average is formed over several measurements and displayed The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures This mode is not available for statistics measurements View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed If a trace is frozen View mode the measuremen...

Page 464: ... 1 For both Single sweep mode and Continuous sweep mode averaging takes place over the selected number of sweeps In this case the displayed trace is determined during averaging according to the following formula 1 1 1 n i n i n MeasValue T n Trace Figure 7 49 Equation 2 Where n is the number of the current sweep n 2 Sweep Count No averaging is carried out for the first sweep but the measured value...

Page 465: ...R S FPL1000 offers the selection of linear averaging The trace data is linearized before averaging then averaged and logarithmized again for display on the screen The average value is always displayed correctly irrespective of the sig nal characteristic Trace Smoothing A Video Bandwidth Filter VBW is a hardware based method of smoothing the trace see also Chapter 7 6 1 2 Smoothing the Trace Using ...

Page 466: ... s y Equation 7 1 Linear trace smoothing With s sample number x sample offset from s n aperture size 7 10 1 2 Trace Settings Access Overview Analysis Traces Or TRACE Trace Config You can configure the settings for up to 6 individual traces For settings on spectrograms see Chapter 7 10 2 2 Spectrogram Settings on page 479 Trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file for further analysis For det...

Page 467: ... Auto Peak Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R S FPL1000 saves each trace point in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The Detector is automatically set to PositivePeak This mode is not available for statistics measurements Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R S FPL1...

Page 468: ...n TRACe t MODE HCONtinuous on page 689 Smoothing If enabled the trace is smoothed by the specified value between 1 and 50 The smoothing value is defined as a percentage of the display width The larger the smoothing value the greater the smoothing effect Note Effects of smoothing on post processing functions Note that in Spectrum mode all functions performed after the sweep such as limit checks mar...

Page 469: ...mote command SENSe AVERage n TYPE on page 691 Average Count Determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging Max Hold or Min Hold operations are performed This value is identical to the Sweep Average Count sett...

Page 470: ...race 1 to Trace 6 selects the source trace The second group of buttons labeled Copy to Trace 1 to Copy to Tace 6 selects the destination Remote command TRACe n COPY on page 693 7 10 1 3 How to Configure a Standard Trace Step by step instructions on configuring the trace settings are provided here For details on individual functions and settings see Chapter 7 10 1 2 Trace Settings on page 466 The r...

Page 471: ...tab of the Traces dialog box To display this tab do one of the following Select the TRACE key and then the Trace Copy softkey Select Analysis from the Overview then select the Trace Copy tab 2 Select the Source trace to be copied 3 Select the Copy to Trace button for the trace to which the settings are to be applied The settings from the source trace are applied to the destination trace The newly ...

Page 472: ...e strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies Example In this example you see the spectrogram for the calibration signal of the R S FPL1000 compared to the standard spectrum display Since the signal does not change over time the color of the frequency levels does not change over time i e ver tically The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the col o...

Page 473: ...ommands Activating and configuring spectrograms Chapter 8 8 7 2 Configuring Spectrograms on page 693 Storing results MMEMory STORe n SPECtrogram on page 812 Time Frames 473 Color Maps 475 Markers in the Spectrogram 478 Time Frames The time information in the spectrogram is displayed vertically along the y axis Each line or trace of the y axis represents one or more captured sweep and is called a t...

Page 474: ...ps the sweep count defines how many sweeps are analyzed to create a single trace Thus for a trace in Average mode for example a sweep count of 10 means that 10 sweeps are averaged to create a single trace or frame The frame count on the other hand determines how many frames are plotted during a single sweep measurement as opposed to a continuous sweep For a frame count of 2 for example 2 frames wi...

Page 475: ... alternatively a time stamp if activated The current frame displayed at the top of the diagram is frame number 0 Older frames further down in the diagram are indicated by a negative index e g 10 You can display the spectrum diagram of a previous frame by changing the current frame number Color Maps Spectrograms assign power levels to different colors to visualize them The legend above the spectrog...

Page 476: ...to a specified power level in the spectrogram display By default colors on the color map are distributed evenly How ever to visualize a certain area of the value range in greater detail than the rest you can set the focus of the color mapping to that area Changing the focus is performed by changing the shape of the color curve The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution ...

Page 477: ... covered by red yellow and a few shades of green Figure 7 52 Spectrogram with default linear color curve shape 0 The sample spectrogram is dominated by blue and green colors After shifting the color curve to the left negative value more colors cover the range from 100 dBm to 60 dBm blue green and yellow This range occurs more often in the example The range from 60 dBm to 20 dBm on the other hand i...

Page 478: ...me 2 In the spectrogram result display you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at the same time Each marker can be assigned to a different frame Therefore in addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new marker If no frame number is specified the marker is positioned on the currently selected frame All markers are visible that are positioned on a visib...

Page 479: ...nal sweep settings for spectrogram display See Chapter 7 6 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration on page 390 Search functions for spectrogram markers are described in Chapter 7 9 3 2 Marker Search Settings for Spectrograms on page 432 General Spectrogram Settings 479 Color Map Settings 481 General Spectrogram Settings Access TRACE Spectrogram Config This section describes general settings for s...

Page 480: ...e timestamp The timestamp shows the system time while the measurement is running In single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped the timestamp shows the time and date of the end of the sweep When active the timestamp replaces the display of the frame number Remote command CALCulate n SPECtrogram TSTamp STATe on page 697 CALCulate n SPECtrogram TSTamp DATA on page 696 Color Mapping Opens the Color ...

Page 481: ...nly for a channel defined sequence In this case the Sequencer sweeps a channel setup in single sweep mode only once Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed channel setup is updated For details on the Sequencer see Chapter 5 4 1 The Sequencer Con...

Page 482: ... horizontal axis value range Start Stop Defines the lower and upper boundaries of the value range of the spectrogram Remote command DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor LOWer on page 698 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor UPPer on page 699 Shape Defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display 1 to 0 More colors are distributed among the lower values 0 Colors are dis...

Page 483: ... set the color curve shape numerically on page 486 To display a spectrogram 1 In the Overview select Display then drag the evaluation type Spectrogram to the diagram area Alternatively a Select the TRACE key and then the Spectrogram Config softkey b Toggle Spectrogram to On 2 To clear an existing spectrogram display select Clear Spectrogram 3 Start a new measurement using RUN SINGLE or RUN CONT Th...

Page 484: ...e a single frame d In the Frame Count field define how many frames are to be plotted during a single sweep measurement e To include frames from previous sweeps in the analysis of the new frame for Max Hold Min Hold and Average trace modes only select Continue Frame On 2 Define how many frames are to be stored in total a Select the TRACE key and then the Spectrogram Config softkey b Select the Hist...

Page 485: ...tal axis of the diagram that means the difference between the start and stop values must be at least 10 The value range of the color map can be set numerically or graphically To set the value range graphically using the color range sliders 1 Select and drag the bottom color curve slider indicated by a gray box at the left of the color curve pane to the lowest value you want to include in the color...

Page 486: ...e color distribution on the color map By default the color curve is linear i e the colors on the color map are distributed evenly If you shift the curve to the left or right the distribution becomes non linear The slope of the color curve increases or decreases One end of the color palette then covers a large number of results while the other end distributes several colors over a relatively small ...

Page 487: ...h tasks the results from several traces can be combined using mathematical functions Trace Math Function 487 Trace Math Off 488 Trace Math Position 488 Trace Math Mode 488 Trace Math Function Defines which trace is subtracted from trace 1 The result is displayed in trace 1 and refers to the zero point defined with the Trace Math Position setting The following sub tractions can be performed T1 T2 T...

Page 488: ...erted into W prior to subtraction i e averaging is done in W The unit is set to either V A dBmV dBµV dBµA or dBpW the data is converted into V prior to subtraction i e subtraction is done in V Log Activates logarithmic subtraction This subtraction method only takes effect if the grid is set to a loga rithmic scale i e the unit of the data is dBm In this case the values are subtracted in dBm Otherw...

Page 489: ...nts are below or above the marked level values use limit lines for that task see Chapter 7 11 2 1 Basics on Limit Lines on page 491 Two different types of display lines are provided Two horizontal lines Horizontal Line 1 and Horizontal Line 2 These lines are continuous horizontal lines across the entire width of a diagram and can be shifted up and down Two vertical lines Vertical Line 1 and Vertic...

Page 490: ...68 Horizontal Line 1 Horizontal Line 2 Activates a horizontal display line H1 or H2 in the diagram at the specified point of the y axis Remote command CALCulate n DLINe k on page 767 CALCulate n DLINe k on page 767 7 11 1 3 Defining Display Lines 1 Display lines are configured in the Lines Config dialog box To display this dialog box press the LINES key and then Lines Config 2 Select the Display L...

Page 491: ...t lines stored in the instrument is only limited by the capacity of the storage device used Limit line data can also be exported to a file in ASCII CSV format for further evalua tion in other applications Limit lines stored in the specified ASCII CSV format can also be imported to the R S FPL1000 for other measurements Compatibility Limit lines are compatible with the current measurement settings ...

Page 492: ...isplayed Margins are defined as lines with a fixed distance to the limit line To check the signal for maximum levels you must define an upper limit whereas to check the signal for minimum levels you must define a lower limit Limits can be defined relative to the reference level the beginning of the time scale or the center frequency or as absolute values Relative scaling is suitable for example if...

Page 493: ...an existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally or vertically Defining a shift width for the values or position of the individual data points changes the line configuration thus changing the position of the line in the dia gram Limit Check Results A limit check is automatically performed as soon as any of the limit lines is activated Visibility setting Only the specified Traces to be Ch...

Page 494: ...The Spectrum Application RF Measurements R S FPL1000 494 User Manual 1178 3370 02 03 Figure 7 56 Margin violation for limit check Figure 7 57 Limit violation for limit check Display and Limit Lines ...

Page 495: ...t line values After recalling measurement settings the limit line values applied to the measurement may be different to those displayed in the Limit Lines dialog box see Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings on page 100 7 11 2 2 Limit Line Settings and Functions Access Overview Analysis Lines or LINES Line Config Up to 8 limit lines can be displayed simultaneously in the R S FPL1...

Page 496: ...or the current measurement For details on settings for individual lines see Limit Line Details on page 498 For more basic information on limit lines see Chapter 7 11 2 1 Basics on Limit Lines on page 491 Name 496 Unit 497 Compatibility 497 Visibility 497 Traces to be Checked 497 Comment 497 Included Lines in Overview View Filter 497 Show Lines for all Modes 497 X Offset 497 Y Offset 498 Create New...

Page 497: ...Traces to be Checked violate any of the active limit lines a message is indicated in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k TRACe t CHECk on page 780 Comment An optional description of the limit line Included Lines in Overview View Filter Defines which of the stored lines are included in the overview Show Com patible Only compatible lines Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in...

Page 498: ...and CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer OFFSet on page 773 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer OFFSet on page 777 Create New Line Creates a new limit line Edit Line Edit an existing limit line configuration Copy Line Copy the selected limit line configuration to create a new line Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k COPY on page 779 Delete Line Delete the selected limit line configuration Remote command CALCulate n LIM...

Page 499: ...limit line name All names must be compatible with Windows conventions for file names The limit line data is stored under this name with a LIN extension Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k NAME on page 775 Comment Defines an optional comment for the limit line Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k COMMent on page 770 Threshold Defines an absolute threshold value only for relative scaling of the y axis ...

Page 500: ...he refer ence Scaling linear or logarithmic Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer MODE on page 773 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer MODE on page 776 CALCulate n LIMit k CONTrol DOMain on page 770 CALCulate n LIMit k CONTrol SPACing on page 772 Y Axis Describes the vertical axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined Includes the following settings Level unit Scaling mode absolute or re...

Page 501: ...t defined for the entire limit line see Y Offset on page 498 Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer SHIFt on page 774 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer SHIFt on page 777 Save Saves the currently edited limit line under the name defined in the Name field Import Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the limit line from the selected file in CSV format Note that a valid import file must contain a mini...

Page 502: ... configure a new limit line on page 503 How to move the limit line vertically or horizontally on page 504 How to find compatible limit lines In the Line Config dialog box select the View Filter option Show Compatible All stored limit lines with the file extension LIN in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder of the instrument that are compatible to the current mea surement settings a...

Page 503: ...cribed in How to configure a new limit line on page 503 5 Save the new configuration by selecting the Save button The new limit line is displayed in the overview and can be activated How to delete an existing limit line 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the limit line 2 Select the Delete button 3 Confirm the message The limit line and the results of the limit check are deleted How to configur...

Page 504: ...must be within the valid value range and is not displayed in the dia gram or preview area 8 Optionally if the y axis uses relative scaling define an absolute Threshold as an additional criteria for a violation 9 Save the new configuration by selecting the Save button The new limit line is displayed in the overview and can be activated How to move the limit line vertically or horizontally A configu...

Page 505: ...e and the extension CSV For details on the file format see Chapter 7 11 2 4 Reference Limit Line File For mat on page 506 How to import a limit line Limit line configurations that are stored in an ASCII file and contain a minimum of required data can be imported to the R S FPL1000 For details on the required file format see Chapter 7 11 2 4 Reference Limit Line File Format on page 506 1 In the Lin...

Page 506: ...ader data sep Separator for individual values required by Microsoft Excel for example Type RS_LimitLineDefinition Type of data FileFormatVersion 1 00 File format version Date 01 Oct 2006 Date of data set storage OptionID SpectrumAnalyzer Application the limit line was created for Name RELFREQ1 Limit line name Comment Defines the upper limit line Description of limit line XAxisScaling LINEAR Scalin...

Page 507: ... on page 395 Single Zoom Versus Multiple Zoom 507 Zoom Functions 509 How to Zoom Into a Diagram 510 7 12 1 Single Zoom Versus Multiple Zoom Two different graphical zoom modes are available single zoom and multiple zoom A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are vis...

Page 508: ...1178 3370 02 03 Figure 7 58 Single zoom Figure 7 59 Multiple zoom Using the zoom area to restrict a peak search The selected zoom area can be used to restrict the search range for a peak search but only in single zoom mode see Use Zoom Limits on page 432 Zoomed Displays ...

Page 509: ...ent areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe on page 687 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom ...

Page 510: ...n the diagram on page 511 To zoom into the diagram at one position 1 Click on the Single Zoom icon in the toolbar Zoom mode is activated 2 Select the area in the diagram to be enlarged on the touchscreen The selected area is indicated by a dotted rectangle When you leave the touchscreen the diagram is replaced by the zoomed trace area 3 Repeat these steps if necessary to enlarge the diagram furthe...

Page 511: ... diagram and a second zoom window is displayed 4 Repeat these steps if necessary to zoom into further trace areas up to four To move or change zoom areas In multiple zoom mode you can change the size or position of the individual zoom areas easily at any time 1 If necessary switch off zoom mode and return to selection mode by selecting the Selection Mode icon in the toolbar 2 To resize a zoom area...

Page 512: ...s for those applications for details Trace Data Export Configuration 512 How to Export Trace Data and Numerical Results 514 How to Export a Peak List 514 Reference ASCII File Export Format 515 7 13 1 Trace Data Export Configuration Access Save Export Trace Export Configuration Or TRACE Trace Config Trace Data Export The R S FPL1000 provides various evaluation methods for the results of the per for...

Page 513: ... The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Remote command FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 811 Include Instrument Measurement Settings Includes additional instrument and measurement settings in the header of the export file for result data See Chapter 7 13 4 Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 515 for...

Page 514: ...ve Evaluation List on page 337 Spurious To export trace data and table results 1 Select TRACE Trace Config Trace Data Export tab 2 Select Export all Traces and all Table Results to export all available measure ment result data for the current application or select a specific Trace to Export 3 Optionally select the Include Instrument Measurement Settings option to insert additional information in t...

Page 515: ...ader containing important scaling parameters and a data sec tion containing the trace data Optionally the header can be excluded from the file see Include Instrument Measurement Settings on page 513 The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace n n number of stored trace foll...

Page 516: ...0 dBm Reference level Level Offset 0 dB Level offset Rf Att 20 dB Input attenuation El Att 2 0 dB Electrical attenuation RBW 100000 Hz Resolution bandwidth VBW 30000 Hz Video bandwidth SWT 0 005 s Sweep time Sweep Count 20 Number of sweeps set Ref Position 75 Position of reference level referred to diagram limits 0 lower edge Level Range 100 dB Display range in y direction Unit dB with x axis LOG ...

Page 517: ...1 First trace Table 7 26 ASCII file format for spectrogram trace export File contents Description Header Type R S FPL1000 Instrument model Version 5 00 Firmware version Date 01 Oct 2006 Date of data set storage Mode ANALYZER SPECTROGRAM Operating mode Center Freq 55000 Hz Center frequency Freq Offset 0 Hz Frequency offset Span 90000 Hz Frequency range 0 Hz in zero span and statistics measure ments...

Page 518: ...W depending on the selected unit with y axis LOG or with y axis LIN Values 1001 Number of measurement points Frames 2 Number of exported frames Frame 0 Most recent frame number Timestamp 17 Mar 11 11 27 05 990 Timestamp of this frame 10000 10 3 15 7 10130 11 5 16 9 10360 12 0 17 4 Measured values identical to spectrum data x value y1 y2 y2 being available only with detector AUTOPEAK and containing...

Page 519: ...thin one channel repeatedly Additional information An application note discussing measurement speed optimization is available from the Rohde Schwarz website 1EF90 Speeding up Spectrum Analyzer Measurements 7 14 2 Improving Averaging Results Instead of trace averaging use an RMS detector with a higher sweep time to obtain better average power results in less time Furthermore enforce the use of the ...

Page 520: ...ds for Result Displays 632 Setting Basic Spectrum RF Measurement Parameters 640 Managing Settings and Results 785 Configuring the R S FPL1000 815 Using the Status Register 840 Deprecated Commands 853 8 1 Conventions Used in SCPI Command Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting ...

Page 521: ... description is inserted 8 2 Common Suffixes In the Spectrum application the following common suffixes are used in remote com mands Table 8 1 Common suffixes used in remote commands in the Spectrum application Suffix Value range Description m 1 to 16 Marker n 1 to 16 Window in the currently selected channel setup t 1 to 6 Trace 8 3 Common Commands Common commands are described in the IEEE 488 2 IE...

Page 522: ...nment on page 160 CLS Clear status Sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer Usage Setting only ESE Value Event status enable Sets the event status enable register to the specified value The query returns the...

Page 523: ... ted This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query form writes a 1 into the output buffer as soon as all preceding commands have been executed This is used for command synchronization OPT Option identification query Queries the options included in the instrument For a list of all available options and their description refer to the data sheet Usage Query only PCB Address Pass contro...

Page 524: ...ents of the power on status clear flag Parameters Action 0 1 0 The contents of the status registers are preserved 1 Resets the status registers RST Reset Sets the instrument to a defined default status The default settings are indicated in the description of commands The command is equivalent to SYSTem PRESet Usage Setting only SRE Contents Service request enable Sets the service request enable re...

Page 525: ...tate after the test is completed In this case the self test cannot be aborted Return values ErrorCode integer 0 in decimal format An error occurred 0 No errors occurred Usage Query only WAI Wait to continue Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled see also command synchronization and OPC Usage Event 8 4 Commands for ...

Page 526: ...re required to select the operating mode or the application and to configure a Sequencer in a remote environment Selecting the Mode and Applications 526 Performing a Sequence of Measurements 530 Programming Example Performing a Sequence of Measurements 532 8 5 1 Selecting the Mode and Applications DISPlay ATAB 526 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate 527 INSTrument CREate NEW 527 INSTrument CREate REPLace ...

Page 527: ...hannelName This command adds an additional channel setup See also INSTrument SELect on page 529 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate on page 527 Parameters ChannelType Channel type of the new channel setup For a list of available channel setup types see INSTrument LIST on page 528 ChannelName String containing the name of the channel setup The channel setup name is displayed as the tab label for the channe...

Page 528: ...ing the name of the channel setup you want to delete A channel setup must exist in order to be able delete it Usage Event Manual operation See Closing a channel setup on page 85 INSTrument LIST This command queries all active channel setups This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing channel setups which are required in order to replace or delete the channel setups Return values Ch...

Page 529: ...tup you want to rename ChannelName2 String containing the new channel setup name Note that you cannot assign an existing channel setup name to a new channel setup this will cause an error Usage Setting only Manual operation See Changing the Channel Setup Name on page 66 INSTrument SELect ChannelType ChannelName This command activates a new channel setup with the defined channel setup type or selec...

Page 530: ...ts The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate n SEQuencer IMMediate on page 530 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 531 Suffix n irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 88 INITiate n SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Before this command can ...

Page 531: ...ls have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MO...

Page 532: ...e Sequencer State on page 88 8 5 3 Programming Example Performing a Sequence of Measurements This example demonstrates how to perform several measurements in a sequence in a remote environment 2xSpectrumanalyzer 2xIQ start Sequencer at the end test OPC Preparing the instrument and first channel RST Activate new IQ channel INSTrument CREate NEW IQ IQ 1 Set sweep count for new IQ channel SENS SWEEP ...

Page 533: ...rd CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer PRESet FW3Gppcdma Change trace modes DISP TRAC2 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC1 MODE MINH Performing a sweep and retrieving results Change sweep count SENS SWEep COUNt 7 Single Sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Switch back to first IQ channel INST SEL IQ 1 WAI Perform a measurement INIT IMM OPC Retrieve results CALC MARK Y Activate Multiview DISPlay ATAB ON Performing a sequence of ...

Page 534: ...owing commands are required to configure measurements in a remote environ ment The tasks for manual operation are described in Chapter 7 2 Measurements and Results on page 232 Performing Measurements 534 Configuring Power Measurements 537 Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR 542 Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio 559 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth 560 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask 561 M...

Page 535: ...locked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R S FPL on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depending on the used interface and protocol send the following commands Visa viClear Now you can send the ABORt comma...

Page 536: ...us sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep Manual operation See Frequency ...

Page 537: ...ent is in single sweep mode Example SWE COUNt 64 Sets sweep count to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT Starts a sweep without waiting for the sweep end SWE COUN CURR Queries the number of started sweeps Usage Query only 8 6 2 Configuring Power Measurements The following commands work for several power measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer MODE 537 CALCulate n MARKer m ...

Page 538: ...n page 266 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult Measurement This command queries the results of power measurements To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 536 Suffix n m irrelevant sb 1 2 3 4 5 Multi S...

Page 539: ...Hz CPOWer Channel power measurements Returns the channel power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W For SEM measurements the return value is the channel power of the reference range PPOWer Peak power measurements Returns the peak power The unit of the return values depends ...

Page 540: ... the measurement on the trace selected with SENSe POWer TRACe OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth measurement The R S FPL1000 performs the measurement on the trace that marker 1 is positioned on CN Carrier to noise ratio measurement CN0 Carrier to noise ratio measurement referenced to 1 Hz band width Manual operation See C N on page 280 See C N0 on page 280 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer ST...

Page 541: ...Optimized Settings Adjust Settings on page 266 See Adjust Settings on page 280 See Adjust Settings on page 285 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel This command determines the ideal reference level for the current measurement This automatic routine makes sure that the that the signal power level does not over load the R S FPL1000 or limit the dynamic range by too small a S N ratio To determine the b...

Page 542: ...CLR Measurement 555 Analyzing Measurement Results 555 Programming Examples for Channel Power Measurements 557 8 6 3 1 Managing Measurement Configurations The following commands control measurement configurations for ACLR measure ments CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer PRESet 542 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer STANdard CATalog 543 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer STANdard DELete 543 CALCu...

Page 543: ...standard files Usage Query only Manual operation See User Standards on page 263 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer STANdard DELete Standard This command deletes a file containing an ACLR standard Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Standard String containing the file name of the standard Usage Event Manual operation See User Standards on page 263 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer STANdard SAVE ...

Page 544: ...l NAME CHANnel ch 546 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel 546 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate ch 546 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel ch 546 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt 547 SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs ChannelPairs This command defines the number of pairs of adjacent and alternate channels Parameters ChannelPairs Range 0 to 12 RST 1 Manual operation See Number of channels Tx ...

Page 545: ...er ACHannel BANDwidth CHANnel ch Bandwidth This command defines the channel bandwidth of the transmission channels Suffix ch 1 to 18 Tx channel number Parameters Bandwidth Range 100 Hz to 1000 MHz RST 14 kHz Manual operation See Channel Bandwidth on page 267 See Channel Bandwidth on page 280 See Channel Bandwidth on page 285 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ACHannel Name This command defines a name for t...

Page 546: ...r ACHannel SPACing ALTernate ch Spacing This command defines the distance from transmission channel to alternate channels If you set the channel spacing for the first alternate channel the R S FPL1000 adjusts the spacing of alternate channels of a lower order but not the other way round The command works hierarchically to set a distance from the transmission channel to the 2nd and 3rd alternate ch...

Page 547: ... the frequency domain Parameters Number Range 1 to 18 RST 1 Manual operation See Number of channels Tx Adj on page 264 8 6 3 3 Defining Weighting Filters The following commands define weighting filters for ACLR measurements SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel 547 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALL 548 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate ch 548 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CH...

Page 548: ...r Parameters Alpha Roll off factor Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 269 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel ch Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the transmission channel weighting filter Suffix ch 1 to 18 Tx channel number Parameters Alpha Roll off factor Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 269 SENSe POWer ...

Page 549: ...Te CHANnel ch State This command turns the weighting filter for a transmission channel on and off Suffix ch 1 to 18 Tx channel number Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 269 8 6 3 4 Selecting the Reference Channel The following commands define the reference channel for relative ACLR measure ments SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE 549 SENSe POWer ...

Page 550: ...r ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANual ChannelNumber This command defines a reference channel for relative ACLR measurements You need at least one channel for the command to work Parameters ChannelNumber Range 1 to 18 RST 1 Manual operation See Reference Channel on page 265 8 6 3 5 Checking Limits The following commands configure and query limit checks for channel power and ACLR measurements The re...

Page 551: ...erLimit The limit of the upper adjacent channel Range 200 dBm to 200 dBm RST 200 dBm Manual operation See Limit Check on page 268 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe This command turns the absolute limit check for the adjacent channels on and off You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower STATe Suffix n k irrelevant ...

Page 552: ...ding out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 536 Suffix n k irrelevant Return values LowerACH UpperACH text value The command returns two results The first is the result for the lower the second for the upper adjacent channel PASSED Limit check has passed FAIL Limit check has failed Example INIT IMM WAI CALC LIM ACP ACH RES PASSED PASSED Us...

Page 553: ...r the limit check Suffix n k irrelevant ch 1 to 11 Alternate channel number Parameters LowerLimit The limit of the lower adjacent channel Range 200 dBm to 200 dBm RST 200 dBm UpperLimit The limit of the upper adjacent channel Range 200 dBm to 200 dBm RST 200 dBm Manual operation See Limit Check on page 268 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate ch ABSolute STATe This command turns the absolute limi...

Page 554: ...l Range 0 dB to 100 dB RST 0 dB Default unit dB Manual operation See Limit Check on page 268 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate ch RESult This command queries the state of the limit check for the adjacent or alternate chan nels in an ACLR measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result...

Page 555: ...s command turns the limit check for ACLR measurements on and off Suffix n k irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Limit Check on page 268 8 6 3 6 Performing an ACLR Measurement The following commands are required to perform an ACLR measurement CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL ACP see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 540 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer STATe ...

Page 556: ...nel power density in dBm Hz OFF 0 Channel power in dBm RST 0 Example CALC MARK FUNC POW RES PHZ ON Output of results referred to the channel bandwidth Manual operation See Channel power level and density Power Unit on page 265 SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE Mode This command selects the way the R S FPL1000 displays the power of adjacent chan nels You need at least one adjacent channel for the command t...

Page 557: ...nt CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL ACP Select the user standard GSM CALC MARK FUNC POW PRES GSM Setting Up Channels Create one transmission channel POW ACH TXCH COUN 1 Name the first transmission channel TX Channel POW ACH NAME CHAN1 TX Channel Create two adjacent channels one adjacent channel and one alternate channel POW ACH ACP 2 Name the adjacent channel ABC POW ACH NAME ACH ABC Name the first alternat...

Page 558: ...the weighting filter of the first alternate channel POW ACH FILT ALPH ALT1 0 35 Turn the weighting filter for the first alternate channel on POW ACH FILT ALT1 ON Working with Limits Define a relative limit of 30 dB below the power of the reference channel for both adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Define a relative limit of 25 dB below the power of the reference channel for the first al...

Page 559: ... FUNCtion POWer sb RESult SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth CHANnel ch SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet Programming example Measuring the carrier to noise ratio This programming example demonstrates how to perform a Carrier to noise measure ment in a remote environment Preparing the measurement RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 800MHz Sets the center frequency to the carrier frequency of 800 MHz CALC MAR...

Page 560: ...the channel SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth CHANnel ch SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel Defining search limits CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits STATe on page 717 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits LEFT on page 717 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits RIGHt on page 717 Performing the measurement CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 540 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PO...

Page 561: ...Activate occupied bandwidth measurement CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL OBW Set the percentage of power to 99 POW BWID 99PCT Set the channel bandwidth to 21 kHz POW ACH BAND 21kHz Optimize the instrument settings according to the channel bandwidth POW ACH PRES OBW Determine the ideal reference level for the measurement POW ACH PRES RLEV Set the trace detector to positive peak DET APE Performing the Measure...

Page 562: ...SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet STANdard 562 SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet RESTore 563 SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet STORe 563 CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum sb RESTore This command restores the predefined limit lines for the selected Spectrum Emission Mask standard All modifications made to the predefined limit lines are lost and the factory set values are restored Suffix n k sb irrelevant Example CALC LIM ESP ...

Page 563: ... 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Usage Event Manual operation See Restore Standard Files on page 313 SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet STORe Standard This command saves the current SEM measurement configuration Standard definitions are stored in an xml file The default directory for SEM standards is C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer sem_std Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM...

Page 564: ...els see SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks Multi SEM on page 297 Up to three sub blocks with two gaps can be defined For each sub block the familiar configuration settings concerning ranges limit lines etc can be defined in individual tabs select the sub block using the sb suffix in the correspond ing commands In addition settings on the sub blocks themselves must be configured Useful commands for multi...

Page 565: ...ration See Sub Block Count on page 308 8 6 6 4 Configuring a Sweep List The following commands define a sweep list for SEM measurements The sweep list cannot be configured using remote commands during an on going sweep operation See also CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum sb PCLass PClass LIMit STATe on page 583 SENSe ESPectrum sb HighSPeed 566 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range BANDwidth RESolution 566 SE...

Page 566: ... LIMit PClass STATe 575 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range POINts MINimum VALue 576 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range MLCalc 576 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range RLEVel 577 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range SWEep TIME 577 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range SWEep TIME AUTO 578 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range TRANsducer 578 SENSe ESPectrum sb HighSPeed State This command turns high speed mode for SEM measurements on...

Page 567: ... range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters VBW Video bandwidth Refer to the data sheet for available video bandwidths RST 10 0 MHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See VBW on page 304 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range COUNt Ranges This command queries the number of ranges in the sweep list range is irrelevant Suffix sb 1 2 3 Return values Ranges Number of ranges in the sweep list Usage Quer...

Page 568: ... SEM sweep list covers the R S FPL1000 will not mea sure the ranges that are outside the span results may be invalid greater than the span the SEM sweep list covers the R S FPL1000 will adjust the start frequency of the first SEM range and the stop frequency of the last SEM range to the span For more information see Ranges and Range Settings on page 291 Suffix sb 1 2 3 range 1 30 Selects the measu...

Page 569: ...lt unit Hz Manual operation See Range Start Range Stop on page 303 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range INPut ATTenuation Attenuation This command defines the input attenuation for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the input attenuation has to be identical for all ranges Suffix sb 1 2 3 range 1 20 Selects the measurement range Parameters Attenuation Numeric value Refer to the data sheet for...

Page 570: ...tical for all ranges Suffix sb 1 2 3 range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Preamp on page 304 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range INSert Mode This command inserts a new SEM range and updates the range numbers accordingly Suffix sb 1 2 3 range 1 30 Selects the SEM range Parameters Mode AFTer Inserts a range after the selected range BEFore Inserts...

Page 571: ...ual operation See Abs Limit Start Stop n on page 305 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass ABSolute STOP Level This command defines an absolute limit for a SEM range Unlike manual operation you can define an absolute limit anytime and regardless of the limit check mode Suffix sb 1 2 3 range 1 30 Selects the measurement range PClass 1 4 Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters Le...

Page 572: ...L STAR 10 Manual operation See Rel Limit Start Stop n on page 305 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STARt ABS Limit This command defines an absolute limit for the MAX function of the relative limit for a SEM range For more information see Relative limit line functions on page 295 Suffix sb 1 2 3 range 1 30 Selects the SEM range PClass 1 4 Power class for which the limit is defin...

Page 573: ...e absolute level is used as the limit start value Use the SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STARt and SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STARt ABS commands to define these values OFF No function is used the relative limit line is defined by a fixed relative start value Use the SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STARt com mand to define this va...

Page 574: ...an absolute limit for the MAX function of the relative limit for a SEM range For more information see Relative limit line functions on page 295 Suffix sb 1 2 3 range 1 30 Selects the SEM range PClass 1 4 Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters Level Absolute limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range to be used in addition to the relative limit if the MAX function is enabled see SENS...

Page 575: ...it PClass RELative STOP and SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STOP ABS commands to define these values OFF No function is used the relative limit line is defined by a fixed relative stop value Use the SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STOP com mand to define this value RST OFF Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit RELative STOP FUNCtion MAX For a detailed exampl...

Page 576: ...e ESPectrum sb RANGe range POINts MINimum VALue SweepPoint Defines the minimum number of sweep points for the range Suffix sb 1 2 3 range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters SweepPoints Minimum number of sweep points per range Range 1 to 32001 RST 1 Example SENSe1 ESPectrum RANGe3 POINts MIN VALue 400 Manual operation See Min Sweep Points on page 306 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range MLCalc...

Page 577: ...all ranges Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters RefLevel Reference level Refer to the data sheet for the reference level range RST 0 dBm Manual operation See Ref Level on page 304 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range SWEep TIME SweepTime This command defines the sweep time for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the sweep tim...

Page 578: ...er Transducer This command selects a transducer factor for a SEM range Note that the transducer must cover at least the span of the range the x axis has to be linear the unit has to be dB Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters Transducer String containing the transducer file name including the path information Manual operation See T...

Page 579: ...the RRC filter The RRC filter is available if the power reference is the channel power Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Parameters Alpha Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Alpha on page 310 SENSe ESPectrum sb FILTer RRC STATe State This command turns the RRC filter in the reference range on and off The RRC filter is available if the power reference is the channel power ...

Page 580: ...ine the power classes for SEM measurements CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum sb LIMits 580 CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum sb MODE 581 CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum sb VALue 582 CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum sb PCLass COUNt 582 CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum sb PCLass PClass EXCLusive 583 CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum sb PCLass PClass LIMit STATe 583 CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum sb PCLass PClass MAXimum...

Page 581: ...s Max2 to Max3 The value range for power class 4 is defined as Max3 to 200 Only available for CALC LIM ESP PCL COUNT 4 Range 199 to 199 Max3 must be higher than Max2 Return values RangeLimits As a result of the query the range limits including the beginning of the first power class 200 and the end of the last power class 200 are indicated Example CALC LIM ESP LIM 50 50 70 Defines the following pow...

Page 582: ...t as a combination of the CALC LIM ESP MODE MAN and the CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum sb PCLass PClass EXCLusive commands however the power class to be used is not defined directly but via the expected power As opposed to CALC LIM ESP MODE AUTO the power class is not re assigned to the input signal power dynamically but only once when the command is executed Suffix n k irrelevant sb 1 2 3 Paramete...

Page 583: ...nt if CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum sb MODE is set to manual Note that You can only use power classes for which limits are defined Suffix n k irrelevant sb 1 2 3 PClass 1 4 power class Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 ON Activates the first defined power class Manual operation See Used Power Classes on page 310 CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum sb PCLass PClass LIMit STATe S...

Page 584: ...his command defines the upper limit of a particular power class Note The last power class always has an upper limit of 200 dBm The upper limit of a power class must always be the same as the lower limit of the subsequent power class The power class must already exist see CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum sb PCLass COUNt on page 582 Suffix n k irrelevant sb 1 2 3 PClass 1 4 power class Parameters Level...

Page 585: ...owing commands configure the list evaluation Useful commands for SEM measurements described elsewhere MMEMory STORe n LIST on page 812 Remote commands exclusive to SEM measurements CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch AUTO 585 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch AUTO 585 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch IMMediate 586 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch IMMediate 586 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch MARGin 586 CALCul...

Page 586: ...m PSEarch MARGin Threshold CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch MARGin Threshold This command defines the threshold of the list evaluation Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Margin Range 200 to 200 RST 200 Default unit dB Example CALC ESP PSE MARG 100 Sets the margin to 100 dB Manual operation See Margin on page 314 See Margin on page 336 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PSHow State CALCulate n ESPectru...

Page 587: ...mple SEM Measurement In this example we will configure and perform an SEM measurement Note that this example is primarily meant to demonstrate the remote control commands it does not necessarily reflect a useful measurement task For most common measurement stand ards the R S FPL1000 performs the measurement optimally with the predefined set tings without further configuration Preparing the measure...

Page 588: ...M 100 0 Define an absolute limit check for class 1 CALC LIM ESP PCL1 LIM ABS Define a relative limit check for class 2 CALC LIM ESP PCL2 LIM REL Define a manual selection of the power class CALC LIM ESP MODE MAN Activate the use of the second power class for the entire measurement CALC LIM ESP PCL2 ON Configuring a Sweep List Insert a range after range 2 ESP RANG2 INS AFT Insert a range before ran...

Page 589: ...Configuring the limit check Check the absolute and relative limits for all ranges in power class 1 and fails if both limits are violated Since power class 2 is set to be used for the entire measurement values for Limit Check 1 are irrelevant They are defined here to demonstrate the use of the MAX function for relative limits ESP RANG LIM1 STAT AND Enable the use of maximum function for relative li...

Page 590: ...User xml Performing the measurement One sweep INIT ESP Checking the Results Query the result of the limit check for all ranges CALC LIM FAIL Query the peak for each range of the SEM measurement as a list TRAC DATA LIST 8 6 7 Measuring Spurious Emissions All remote control commands specific to spurious emissions measurements are descri bed here Initializing the Measurement 590 Configuring a Sweep L...

Page 591: ...ST RANGe range DELete 592 SENSe LIST RANGe range DETector 593 SENSe LIST RANGe range FILTer TYPE 593 SENSe LIST RANGe range FREQuency STARt 593 SENSe LIST RANGe range FREQuency STOP 594 SENSe LIST RANGe range INPut ATTenuation 594 SENSe LIST RANGe range INPut ATTenuation AUTO 595 SENSe LIST RANGe range INPut GAIN STATe 595 SENSe LIST RANGe range INPut GAIN VALue 595 SENSe LIST RANGe range LIMit ST...

Page 592: ... the measurement range Parameters VBW Video bandwidth Refer to the data sheet for available video bandwidths Default unit Hz Manual operation See VBW on page 333 SENSe LIST RANGe range COUNt This command queries the number of ranges in the sweep list range is irrelevant Return values Ranges Number of ranges in the sweep list Usage Query only SENSe LIST RANGe range DELete This command removes a ran...

Page 593: ...uffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Manual operation See Filter Type on page 332 SENSe LIST RANGe range FREQuency STARt Frequency This command defines the start frequency of a spurious emission measurement range Make sure to set an appropriate span If you set a span that is smaller than the span the sweep list covers the R S FPL1000 will not measure the ranges that are outside the span ...

Page 594: ... the R S FPL1000 will adjust the start frequency of the first range and the stop frequency of the last range to the span For more information seeChapter 7 2 7 Spurious Emissions Measurement on page 327 Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters Frequency Numeric value RST 2 52 MHz range 1 2 52 MHz range 2 250 0 MHz range 3 Default unit Hz Manual operation See Range Start Range Stop...

Page 595: ...nt range on and off Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Preamp on page 334 SENSe LIST RANGe range INPut GAIN VALue Gain This command selects the preamplification level for the range Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range SENSe LIST RANGe range LIMit STARt Level This command defines an absolute limit for a spurious emission...

Page 596: ... of a SEM range Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Manual operation See Abs Limit Start Abs Limit Stop on page 335 SENSe LIST RANGe range POINts VALue Points This command defines the number of sweep points in a spurious emission measure ment range Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters Points For more information on sweep points see Chapter 7 6 1 8 How Much Data is Measur...

Page 597: ...the data sheet for more informa tion Manual operation See Sweep Time on page 333 SENSe LIST RANGe range SWEep TIME AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the sweep time for a spurious emission measurement range on and off Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Manual operation See Sweep Time Mode on page 333 SENSe LIST RANGe range TRANsducer...

Page 598: ...TO 598 CALCulate n PSEarch DETails 598 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch DETails 598 CALCulate n PSEarch MARGin 599 CALCulate n PEAKsearch MARGin 599 CALCulate n PSEarch PSHow 599 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSHow 599 CALCulate n PSEarch SUBRanges 600 CALCulate n PEAKsearch SUBRanges 600 CALCulate n PSEarch AUTO State CALCulate n PEAKsearch AUTO State This command turns the list evaluation on and off Su...

Page 599: ...ge 336 CALCulate n PSEarch MARGin Threshold CALCulate n PEAKsearch MARGin Threshold This command defines the threshold of the list evaluation Suffix n Window Parameters Margin Range 200 to 200 RST 200 Default unit dB Example CALC PSE MARG 100 Sets the threshold to 100 dB CALCulate n PSEarch PSHow State CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSHow State This command turns the peak labels in the diagram on and off ...

Page 600: ...p MODE on page 564 INITiate n IMMediate on page 536 see Chapter 8 6 1 Performing Measure ments on page 534 8 6 7 5 Retrieving and Saving Settings and Results The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for Spurious mea surements Useful commands for spurious emission measurements described elsewhere CALCulate n LIMit k FAIL on page 782 TRACe n DATA on page 703 TRACe n DATA MEMor...

Page 601: ...andwidth of 500 kHz in range 1 LIST RANG1 BAND VID 5000000 Defines a video bandwidth of 5 MHz for range 1 LIST RANG1 INP ATT AUTO OFF Turns automatic selection of the input attenuation in range 1 off LIST RANG1 INP ATT 10 Defines a input attenuation of 10 dBm for range 1 LIST RANG1 FILT TYPE CFILter Selects an Channel filter for range 1 LIST RANG1 DET SAMP Selects a sample detector for range 1 LIS...

Page 602: ...e Measurement INIT SPUR WAI Performs a spurious emission measurement and waits until the sweep has finished Retrieving Results CALC LIM1 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 1 TRAC SPUR Queries the peak list of the spurious emission measurement 8 6 8 Measuring the Time Domain Power All remote control commands specific to time domain power measurements are descri bed here Configuring...

Page 603: ...ARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AOFF This command turns all time domain power evaluation modes off Suffix n Window m Marker Usage Event CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage State This command switches on or off averaging for the active power measurement in zero span in the window specified by the suffix n If activated a time domain value is cal culated from the trace after each sweep in the end ...

Page 604: ...ed as the current peak The peak hold function is reset by switching it off and on again Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary STATe State This command turns time domain power measurements on and off This measurement in only available in zero span When you turn the measurement on the R S FPL1000 activates a marker and posi tions it on the p...

Page 605: ...ee Results on page 342 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS STATe State This command turns the evaluation to determine the RMS time domain power on and off The R S FPL1000 performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Results on page 342 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation STATe Stat...

Page 606: ...only possi ble if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage on page 603 To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 536 Suffix n Window m Marker Return values MeanP...

Page 607: ... MeanPower Mean power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only Manual operation See Results on page 342 Measuring the Peak Power CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak AVERage RESult This command queries the average positive peak time domain power The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage on page...

Page 608: ...ime domain power To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 536 Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters PeakPower Peak power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only Manual operation See Results on p...

Page 609: ...ing out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 536 Suffix n Window m Marker Return values RMSPower RMS power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS RESult This command queries the RMS of the time domain power To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with sync...

Page 610: ...HOLd RESult This command queries the maximum standard deviation of the time domain power The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PHOLd To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for singl...

Page 611: ... OFF Turns on single sweep mode FREQ CENT 1 8GHz Sets the center frequency to 1 8 GHz BAND RES 100kHz Sets the bandwidth to 100 kHz SWE TIME 10ms Sets the sweep time to 640 µs FREQ SPAN 0 Sets the instrument to zero span CALC MARK FUNC SUMM STAT ON Turns on time domain power measurements CALC MARK FUNC SUMM MEAN ON CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PPE ON CALC MARK FUNC SUMM RMS ON Turns the evalution of the me...

Page 612: ...ctivating the Measurement The following command activates harmonic distortion measurement CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics STATe 612 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics STATe State This command turns the harmonic distortion measurement on and off Note the following If you perform the measurement in the frequency domain the search range for the frequency of the first harmonic whose power...

Page 613: ...LCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics NHARmonics 613 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics PRESet 614 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics BANDwidth AUTO State This command selects the resolution bandwidth of the harmonic in respect to the band width of the first harmonic Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 identical ON 1 a multiple RST 1 Manual operation See Harmonic R...

Page 614: ...ic distortion measurement INITiate n IMMediate on page 536 see Chapter 8 6 1 Performing Measure ments on page 534 8 6 9 4 Retrieving Results The following commands retrieve the results of the harmonic distortion measurement CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion 614 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics LIST 615 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion TOTal This command qu...

Page 615: ...of the first harmonic The unit is variable The other values are power levels relative to the first harmonic The unit for these is dB Usage Query only 8 6 9 5 Example Measuring the Harmonic Distortion Configuring the Measurement RST Resets the instrument INIT CONT OFF Turns on single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC HARM ON Turns on the harmonic distortion measurement CALC MARK FUNC HARM NHAR 3 Defines th...

Page 616: ...r m FUNCtion TOI STATe 616 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI SEARchsignal ONCE 617 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult 617 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI STATe State This command initiates a measurement to determine the third intercept point A two tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the RF input of the instru ment Marker 1 and marker 2 both normal markers are set to the ma...

Page 617: ... point measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 536 Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters TOI Third order intercept point Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC TOI ON Switc...

Page 618: ...6 11 1 Configuring and Performing the Measurement The following commands control the measurement Useful commands for AM modulation depth described elsewhere CALCulate n DELTamarker m X on page 712 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X RELative on page 726 CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 714 Remote commands exclusive to AM modulation depth measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth STATe 618 CALCulate ...

Page 619: ...arch Signals on page 362 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth RESult This command queries the results of the AM modulation depth measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 536 Suffix n Window m Marker ...

Page 620: ... Positions the reference marker on 100 MHz CALC DELT2 X 5KHZ Positions delta marker 2 and 3 at a distance of 5 kHz to the reference marker CALC DELT3 X 1KHZ Corrects the position of delta marker 3 by 1 kHz CALC MARK FUNC MDEP RES Queries the measurement results for the repositioned markers 8 6 12 List Evaluations A list evaluation is a multiple power measurement that measures the power at up to 20...

Page 621: ...ed for synchroniza tion via service request 8 6 12 1 Performing List Evaluations All remote control commands specific to list evaluations which are available via remote control only are described here Remote commands exclusive to list evaluation SENSe LIST POWer RESult 621 SENSe LIST POWer SEQuence 622 SENSe LIST POWer SET 623 SENSe LIST POWer STATe 623 SENSe LIST POWer RESult This command queries...

Page 622: ... list entry Range 0 to Fmax Default unit Hz RefLevel Defines the reference level for a list entry Range 130 to 30 Increment 0 01 Default unit dBm RFAttenuation Defines the RF attenuation for a list entry Range 0 to 70 Increment 1 Default unit dB FilterType Selects the filter type for a list entry For more information see SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE RBW Defines the resolution bandwidth for a li...

Page 623: ...peak power evaluation on and off RST 1 RMSPower ON OFF 0 1 Turns RMS power evaluation on and off RST 0 AVGPower ON OFF 0 1 Turns average power evaluation on and off RST 0 TriggerSource Selects a trigger source TriggerSlope NEGative POSitive Selects the trigger slop TriggerOffset Defines the trigger delay Range negative measurement time to 30 s RST 0 Default unit s GateLength Defines the gate lengt...

Page 624: ...FIL 30KHZ 100KHZ 440us 0 OPC Defines a list with 3 entries and initiates the measurement with synchronization to the end Analyzer produces a service request On service request SENS LIST POW RES Returns the results of the measurements two for each frequency peak and RMS power Initiliazing the measurement and querying results simultaneously LIST POW 935 2MHZ 0 10 OFF NORM 1MHZ 3MHZ 440us 0 935 4MHZ ...

Page 625: ... controls those functions the R S FPL1000 aborts the Pulse Power measurement The R S FPL1000 also aborts the Pulse Power measurement if you end the remote session The commands can be used in two different ways Instrument setup measurement and querying of the results in a single command line With this method there is the least delay between the measurement and the result output However it requires ...

Page 626: ...oniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 536 Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters TimeOffset Defines a time offset to start the measurement at the first pulse of a trace RST 0 Default unit s MeasTime Defines the measurement time Default unit s PulsePeriod Defines the pulse period OfPulse...

Page 627: ...urement The R S FPL1000 caches all measurement parameters that you can set with this command If you use the command repeatedly the R S FPL1000 only changes those settings that you have actually changed before initiating the measurement Thus mea surement times are kept as low as possible If you synchronize the measurement with OPC the R S FPL1000 produces a service request when all frequencies have...

Page 628: ...Range 1 to 32001 Return values PowerLevel Pulse power level The result is a list of floating point values separated by commas The unit is dBm SENSe MPOWer RESult MIN This command queries the lowest pulse power that has been measured during a pulse power measurement If there are no results the command returns an error Return values PulsePower Lowest power level of the pulse power measurement The un...

Page 629: ...3129883 115 7760849 126 279388428 124 620399475 116 97366333 8 6 14 Programming Example Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep This example demonstrates how to configure and perform a basic frequency sweep measurement in a remote environment Preparing the measurement RST Resets the instrument INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode Configuring the Frequency and Span FREQ CENT 100MHz Defines the center...

Page 630: ...el to the attenuation instead of vice versa Configuring the Amplitude and Scaling DISP TRAC1 Y RLEV 10dBm Sets the reference level to 10 dBm DISP TRAC1 Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Shifts the trace display in the diagram up by 10dB CALC UNIT POW V Sets the unit of the y axis to Volt The reference level is now 70 711 mV DISP TRAC1 Y SPAC LOG Uses logarithmic scaling with absolute values V DISP TRAC1 Y 110dB In...

Page 631: ... SENS DET1 POS SENS DET2 RMS SENS DET3 POS Configures traces 1 and 3 to use the positive peak detector trace 2 uses the RMS detector TRAC COPY TRACE4 TRACE1 Copies trace 1 to a new trace 4 which will then be averaged SENS AVER STAT4 ON SENS AVER COUN 10 SENS AVER TYPE LIN Configures trace 4 to be averaged linearly over 10 sweeps CALC MATH STAT ON CALC MATH MODE LIN CALC MATH TRACE1 TRACE2 CALC MAT...

Page 632: ...AYout ADD WINDow 632 LAYout CATalog WINDow 633 LAYout IDENtify WINDow 633 LAYout MOVE WINDow 634 LAYout REMove WINDow 634 LAYout REPLace WINDow 635 LAYout SPLitter 635 LAYout WINDow n ADD 636 LAYout WINDow n IDENtify 637 LAYout WINDow n REMove 637 LAYout WINDow n REPLace 637 LAYout ADD WINDow WindowName Direction WindowType This command adds a window to the display in the active channel setup This...

Page 633: ... LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active channel setup from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax WindowName_1 WindowIndex_1 WindowName_n WindowIndex_n Return values WindowName string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index WindowIndex nume...

Page 634: ...ndow is placed next to or replaces By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active channel setup use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query arg2 LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow REPLace Destination the selected window is moved to relative to the ref erence window Example LAY MOVE 4 1 LEFT Moves the window named 4 to the left of window 1 E...

Page 635: ... WINDow query WindowType Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 632 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table Usage Setting only LAYout SPLitter Index1 Index2 Position This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on ...

Page 636: ...ow 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically LAY SPL 3 2 70 LAY SPL 4 1 70 LAY SPL 2 1 70 LAYout WINDow n ADD Direction WindowType This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n de...

Page 637: ... window is its index Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow n REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix n from the display in the active channel setup The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Suffix n Window Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window ...

Page 638: ...e demonstrates how to configure result displays in a remote envi ronment 8 7 2 1 Example 1 Adding and Arranging Windows Starting from the default initial display in the Spectrum application Frequency Sweep we will configure the following result displays 1 Frequency Sweep 3 Marker Table 2 Spectrogram 4 Marker Peak List Resetting the instrument RST Adding new windows Add a Spectrogram window beneath...

Page 639: ...k List window to enlarge the Spectrogram display to 60 of the entire width LAY SPL 2 4 60 Querying all displayed windows Query the name and number of all displayed windows from top left to bottom right LAY CAT Result 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Maximizing a Window Maximize the window 2 Spectrogram DISP WIND2 SIZE LARG Restore multiple window display DISP WIND2 SIZE SMAL 8 7 2 2 Example 2 Replacing and Removin...

Page 640: ... LAY CAT Result 1 1 4 4 Changing the size of individual windows Move the splitter between the Frequency Sweep window and the Marker Table window to enlarge the spectrum display to 80 of the entire height LAY SPL 1 4 80 8 8 Setting Basic Spectrum RF Measurement Parameters Commands required for common spectrum RF measurements are described here Defining the Frequency and Span 641 Configuring Bandwid...

Page 641: ...e n MARKer m FUNCtion CSTep 642 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe X SPACing 642 SENSe FREQuency CENTer 642 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP 643 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO 643 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK 643 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor 644 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet 644 SENSe FREQuency SPAN 644 SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL 645 SENSe FREQuency STARt 645 SENSe FREQuency STOP 645 CALCulate n MARKer m ...

Page 642: ...aling RST LINear Example DISP TRAC X SPAC LOG SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP comman...

Page 643: ...378 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO State This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span In time domain zero span measurements the center frequency is coupled to the RBW Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK CouplingType This command couples and decouples t...

Page 644: ...and defines a frequency offset If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 379 Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Manual operation See Frequency Offset on pag...

Page 645: ...n page 378 SENSe FREQuency STOP Frequency This command defines a stop frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters Frequency min span to fmax RST fmax Example FREQ STOP 2000 MHz Manual operation See Frequency Sweep on page 233 See Start Stop on page 378 8 8 1 2 Adjusting Settings Automatically The commands required to adjust settings automatically in a remote environment are descr...

Page 646: ...ANual Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 420 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the i...

Page 647: ... be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 421 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 648 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input sign...

Page 648: ...ence level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R S FPL1000 or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 386 8 8 1 3 Configuring Signal Tracking When signal tracking is activated the maximum signal is determined after each fre quency sweep a...

Page 649: ...ing the function Default unit Hz Manual operation See Signal Tracking on page 380 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion STRack THReshold Level This command defines the threshold level for the signal tracking process Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command Suffix n m irrelevant Parameters Level The unit depends on CALCulate n UNIT POWer Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 120 d...

Page 650: ...RESolution RATio 651 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution RATio 651 SENSe BWIDth RESolution TYPE 651 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE 651 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo 652 SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo 652 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo AUTO 652 SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO 652 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo RATio 652 SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo RATio 652 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo TYPE 652 SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo TYPE 652 SENSe BWIDth RESolution Bandwidth SENSe BANDw...

Page 651: ...tion bandwidth Hz and the span Hz Note that the ratio defined with this remote command RBW span is reciprocal to that of the coupling ratio span RBW Parameters Ratio Range 0 0001 to 1 RST 0 01 Example BAND RAT 0 1 Manual operation See Span RBW on page 398 SENSe BWIDth RESolution TYPE FilterType SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE FilterType This command selects the resolution filter type When you chan...

Page 652: ...and width Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example BAND VID AUTO OFF Manual operation See VBW on page 397 See RBW VBW on page 398 See Default Coupling on page 399 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo RATio Ratio SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo RATio Ratio This command defines the coupling ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution band width RBW VBW Parameters Ratio Range 0 001 to 1000 RST 1 Example BAND VID RAT 3 Sets ...

Page 653: ...the Sweep Useful commands for configuring sweeps described elsewhere SENSe AVERage n COUNt on page 690 SENSe AVERage n STATe t on page 691 SENSe AVERage n TYPE on page 691 Remote commands exclusive to configuring sweeps SENSe SWEep COUNt 653 SENSe SWEep DURation 654 SENSe SWEep OPTimize 654 SENSe SWEep POINts 655 SENSe SWEep TIME 656 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO 656 SENSe SWEep TYPE USED 656 SENSe SWEep ...

Page 654: ...red to capture the data and process it This time span may be considerably longer than the actual sweep time see SENSe SWEep TIME on page 656 Tip To determine the necessary timeout for data capturing in a remote control pro gram double the estimated time and add 1 second Return values Time Example SWE TIME 1s SWE DUR Reply 27 9734842578 Usage Query only Manual operation See Sweep Time on page 398 S...

Page 655: ... a fast sweep rate The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is activated to obtain the best control range for the A D converter Zero span mode For zero span measurements the optimization mode defines the selection of the A D converter prefilter Table 8 4 Optimization parameters in zero span mode Optimization mode Description DYNamic The narrowest filter possible depending on the...

Page 656: ...page 266 See Sweep Time on page 398 See Sweep Time on page 410 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO State This command couples and decouples the sweep time to the span and the resolution and video bandwidths Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example SWE TIME AUTO ON Activates automatic sweep time Manual operation See Harmonic Sweep Time on page 349 See Sweep Time on page 398 See Default Coupling on page 399 SENS...

Page 657: ...57 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel 658 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet 658 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion REFerence This command matches the reference level to the power level of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Suffix n Window m Marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC REF Sets the reference level to th...

Page 658: ... is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Manual operation See Reference Level on page 385 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset for all traces in all windows Suffix n t irrelevant Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST 0dB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display...

Page 659: ... Value on page 386 INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R S FPL1000 determines the signal level for opti mal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Manua...

Page 660: ...e t Y SCALe MODE 661 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDIVision 661 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition 661 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SPACing 662 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis for all traces Note that the command works only for a logarithmic scaling You can select the scaling with DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SPACing Suffix n Wind...

Page 661: ... page 389 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Suffix n Window t irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 Value RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing ...

Page 662: ...in LDB Linear scaling in the specified unit PERCent Linear scaling in RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in Manual operation See Scaling on page 389 8 8 4 Configuring Triggered and Gated Measurements The commands required to configure a triggered or gated measurement in a remote environment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in Chapter ...

Page 663: ...s DropoutTime Dropout time of the trigger Range 0 s to 10 0 s RST 0 s Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 412 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep A negative offset is possible for time domain measurements For the trigger sources External or IF Power a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore...

Page 664: ...g ger sources Parameters Hysteresis Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 412 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port TriggerLevel This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Parameters TriggerLevel For the R S FPL1000 the...

Page 665: ...l trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 413 TRIGger SEQ...

Page 666: ...ng the power sensor as an external trigger on page 370 See Trigger Source on page 410 See Free Run on page 410 See External Trigger 1 on page 411 See Video on page 411 See IF Power on page 411 See Time on page 411 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval Interval This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Parameters Interval 2 0 ms to 5000 Range 2 ms to 5000 s RST 1 0 s Example TRIG ...

Page 667: ...eters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example SWE EGAT ON Switches on the external gate mode SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE Switches on the edge triggered mode SWE EGAT HOLD 100US Sets the gate delay to 100 µs SWE EGAT LEN 500US Sets the gate opening time to 500 µs INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff DelayTime This command defines the delay time between the gate signal and the conti...

Page 668: ...ual operation See Slope on page 413 SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce Source This command selects the signal source for gated measurements If an IF power signal is used the gate is opened as soon as a signal at 20 dBm is detected within the IF path bandwidth 10 MHz For more information see Trigger Source on page 410 Parameters Source EXTernal IFPower TIME RST IFPower Example SWE EGAT SOUR IFP Switches the ...

Page 669: ... Output The following commands are required to configure data input and output RF Input 669 Working with Power Sensors 671 Configuring the Outputs 681 8 8 5 1 RF Input INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet 669 INPut IMPedance 670 INPut SELect 670 INPut UPORt STATe 670 INPut UPORt VALue 670 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input...

Page 670: ...F INPUT connector RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 364 INPut UPORt STATe State This command toggles the control lines of the user ports for the AUX PORT connector This 9 pole SUB D male connector is located on the rear panel of the R S FPL1000 See the R S FPL1000 Getting Started manual for details Parameters State ON 1 User port is switched to INPut OFF 0 User port is swit...

Page 671: ...STATe 671 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt 671 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p DEFine 672 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p CONFigure AUTO STATe State This command turns automatic assignment of a power sensor to the power sensor index on and off Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET CONF AUTO OFF Manual operation See Select on pa...

Page 672: ...sensor with the serial number 123456 to the configuration Power Sensor 2 SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF Queries the sensor assigned to Power Sensor 2 Result NRP Z81 USB 123456 The NRP Z81 power sensor with the serial number 123456 is assigned to the Power Sensor 2 Manual operation See Select on page 368 Configuring Power Sensor Measurements CALibration PMETer p ZERO AUTO ONCE 673 CALCulate n PMETer p RE...

Page 673: ...he execution of further commands until zeroing is concluded Usage Event Manual operation See Zeroing Power Sensor on page 368 CALCulate n PMETer p RELative MAGNitude RefValue This command defines the reference value for relative measurements Suffix n Window p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters RefValue Range 200 dBm to 200 dBm RST 0 Example CALC PMET2 REL 30 Sets the reference value for relative me...

Page 674: ...ensor measurements on and off Suffix n Window p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC PMET2 REL STAT ON Activates the relative display of the measured value for power sensor 2 FETCh PMETer p This command queries the results of power sensor measurements Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Return values Level Power level that has been measured by a power sensor The unit i...

Page 675: ...defines the duty cycle for the correction of pulse signals The power sensor uses the duty cycle in combination with the mean power to calculate the power of the pulse Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor Parameters Percentage Range 0 001 to 99 999 RST 99 999 Default unit Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Activates the duty cycle correction PMET2 DCYC VAL 0 5 Sets the correction value to 0 5 Manual operation See Dut...

Page 676: ...e center frequency of the analyzer MARKer1 Couples the frequency to the position of marker 1 OFF Switches the frequency coupling off RST CENTer Example PMET2 FREQ LINK CENT Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer Manual operation See Frequency Coupling on page 368 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe Duration This command selects the duration of power sensor measurements Suffix p 1 4 Power s...

Page 677: ...o 256 Increment binary steps 1 2 4 8 Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging PMET2 MTIM AVER COUN 8 Sets the number of readings to 8 Manual operation See Average Count Number of Readings on page 370 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STATe State This command turns averaging for power sensor measurements on and off Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example PM...

Page 678: ...RST 0 Example PMET1 ON Switches the power sensor measurements on Manual operation See State on page 367 See Select on page 368 SENSe PMETer p UPDate STATe State This command turns continuous update of power sensor measurements on and off If on the results are update even if a single sweep is complete Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example PMET1 UPD ON The data fr...

Page 679: ...MET POW RAT DB Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 369 Triggering with Power Sensors SENSe PMETer p TRIGger DTIMe 679 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HOLDoff 680 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HYSTeresis 680 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger LEVel 680 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger SLOPe 681 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger STATe 681 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger DTIMe Time This command defines the time period that the input signal has to stay b...

Page 680: ...operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 371 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HYSTeresis Hysteresis This command defines the trigger hysteresis for external power triggers The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the IF power trigger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters Hysteresis Range 3 dB to 50 dB Increment 1 dB RST 0...

Page 681: ... signal shows a posi tive edge NEGative The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a neg ative edge RST POSitive Example PMET2 TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 371 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger STATe State This command turns the external power trigger on and off Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example PMET2 TRIG ON Switches the external power...

Page 682: ...ple DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source Control on page 374 OUTPut IF SOURce Source Defines the type of signal available at the IF VIDEO connector of the R S FPL Parameters Source IF The measured IF value is available at the IF VIDEO output con nector The frequency at which the IF value is provided is defined using the OUTPut IF IFFRequency command VIDeo The displayed video signal i...

Page 683: ...l of the R S FPL1000 Parameters State ON 1 User port is switched to OUTPut OFF 0 User port is switched to INPut RST 0 OUTPut UPORt VALue Value This command sets the control lines of the user ports The assignment of the pin numbers to the bits is as follows Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Pin N A N A 5 3 4 7 6 2 Bits 7 and 6 are not assigned to pins and must always be 0 The user port is written to with the giv...

Page 684: ... off for demodulated signals This setting applies only to the current application The command is available in the time domain in Spectrum mode and in Analog Demodulation mode To set the volume use the SYSTem SPEaker VOLume command Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SYST SPE ON SYST SPE VOL 0 5 Sets the loudspeaker to half the full volume Manual operation See Data Output on page 374 See Loudsp...

Page 685: ...686 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM AREA x1 y1 x2 y2 This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix n Window Parameters x1 y1 x2 y2 Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin o...

Page 686: ... STATe 687 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA x1 y1 x2 y2 This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix n Window zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters x1 y1 x2 y2 Diagram coordinates in of the comple...

Page 687: ...ired to export traces and other result data are described in Chap ter 8 9 5 Storing Measurement Results on page 810 Configuring Standard Traces 687 Configuring Spectrograms 693 Using Trace Mathematics 700 Retrieving Trace Results 702 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format 705 Programming Example Configuring a Spectrogram 706 8 8 7 1 Configuring Standard Traces Useful commands f...

Page 688: ...e Parameters Mode WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R S FPL1000 saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than t...

Page 689: ... reset works for trace modes min hold max hold and average Note that the command has no effect if critical parameters like the span have been changed to avoid invalid measurement results Suffix n Window t Trace Parameters State ON 1 The automatic reset is off OFF 0 The automatic reset is on RST 0 Example DISP WIND TRAC3 MODE HCON ON Switches off the reset function Manual operation See Hold on page...

Page 690: ... 5 for trace 2 in window 3 Manual operation See Smoothing on page 468 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t SMOothing STATe State This command turns trace smoothing for a particular trace on and off If enabled the trace is smoothed by the value specified using DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t SMOothing APERture on page 690 For more information see Trace Smoothing on page 465 Suffix n Window t Trace Parameters State ON...

Page 691: ...0 RST 0 Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 399 See Average Count on page 469 SENSe AVERage n STATe t State This command turns averaging for a particular trace in a particular window on and off Suffix n Window t Trace Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 SENSe AVERage n TYPE Mode This command selects the trace averaging mode Suffix n Window Parameters Mode VIDeo The logarithmic power values ar...

Page 692: ... Negative peak POSitive Positive peak SAMPle First value detected per trace point RMS RMS value AVERage Average RST APEak Example DET POS Sets the detector to positive peak Manual operation See Detector on page 467 SENSe WINDow n DETector t FUNCtion AUTO State This command couples and decouples the detector to the trace mode Suffix n Window t Trace Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DET AUT...

Page 693: ...e spectrograms in a remote environment are described here For details and manual operation see Chapter 7 10 2 2 Spectrogram Settings on page 479 When configuring spectrograms the window suffix is irrelevant The settings are always applied to the spectrogram window or to all spectrogram windows if several are active for the same channel setup For commands to set markers in spectrograms see Chapter ...

Page 694: ...NTinuous State CALCulate n SPECtrogram CONTinuous State This command determines whether the results of the last measurement are deleted before starting a new measurement in single sweep mode This setting applies to all spectrograms in the channel setup Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts the sweep and wait...

Page 695: ...The command is available if no measurement is running or after a single sweep has ended Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Ex...

Page 696: ... support spectrograms Suffix n Window Parameters State ON Spectrogram and trace diagram share a window OFF Only the trace diagram is displayed the spectrogram is not RST OFF Example CALC4 SPEC LAY FULL Shows the spectrogram in window 4 The corresponding trace diagram is hidden CALCulate n SGRam STATe State CALCulate n SPECtrogram STATe State This command turns the spectrogram on and off Parameters...

Page 697: ...have passed since 01 01 1970 till the frame start Nanoseconds Number of nanoseconds that have passed in addition to the Seconds since 01 01 1970 till the frame start Reserved The third and fourth value are reserved for future uses Example CALC SGR TST ON Activates the time stamp CALC SGR TST DATA ALL Returns the starting times of all frames sorted in a descending order Usage Query only Manual oper...

Page 698: ...trogram COLor UPPer 699 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor STYLe 699 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor STYLe 699 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor DEFault DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor DEFault This command restores the original color map Suffix n Window Usage Event Manual operation See Set to Default on page 483 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor LOWer Percentage DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor LOWer Perc...

Page 699: ...82 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor UPPer Percentage DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor UPPer Percentage This command defines the end point of the color map Suffix n Window Parameters Percentage Statistical frequency percentage Range 0 to 66 RST 0 Default unit Example DISP WIND SGR COL UPP 95 Sets the start of the color map to 95 Manual operation See Start Stop on page 482 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor...

Page 700: ...ration See Hot Cold Radar Grayscale on page 482 8 8 7 3 Using Trace Mathematics The following commands control trace mathematics CALCulate n MATH EXPRession DEFine 700 CALCulate n MATH MODE 701 CALCulate n MATH POSition 701 CALCulate n MATH STATe 702 CALCulate n MATH EXPRession DEFine Expression This command selects the mathematical expression for trace mathematics Before you can use the command y...

Page 701: ...c Logarithmic calculation POWer Linear power calculation RST LOGarithmic Example CALC MATH MODE LIN Selects linear calculation Manual operation See Trace Math Mode on page 488 CALCulate n MATH POSition Position This command defines the position of the trace resulting from the mathematical opera tion Suffix n Window Parameters Position Vertical position of the trace in of the height of the diagram ...

Page 702: ...hapter 8 8 7 5 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 705 Commands required to export traces and other result data are described in Chap ter 8 9 5 Storing Measurement Results on page 810 FORMat DATA 702 TRACe n DATA 703 TRACe n DATA MEMory 704 TRACe n DATA X 705 FORMat DATA Format This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the ...

Page 703: ...nt trace data and measurement results The data format depends on FORMat DATA Suffix n Window Parameters Trace Selects the trace to write the data to TRACE1 TRACE6 Data Contains the data to transfer Query parameters ResultType Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE1 TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace For details see Table 8 5 LIST Returns the results of the peak list...

Page 704: ... and stop frequency of the range RBW resolution bandwidth PeakFreq frequency of the peak in a range PowerAbs absolute power of the peak in dBm PowerRel power of the peak in relation to the channel power in dBc PowerDelta distance from the peak to the limit line in dB positive values indicate a failed limit check LimitCheck state of the limit check 0 PASS 1 FAIL Unused1 Unused2 reserved 0 0 Table 8...

Page 705: ...g for SEM or Spuri ous Emissions measurements Suffix n Window Query parameters TraceNumber Trace number TRACE1 TRACE6 Example TRAC3 X TRACE1 Returns the x values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only 8 8 7 5 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format When trace data is retrieved using the TRAC DATA or TRAC IQ DATA command the data is returned in the format defined using the FORM...

Page 706: ...xample Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep on page 629 Preparing the Measurement RST Resets the instrument LAY ADD 1 BEL SGR Displays a new window below window 1 and activates spectrogram display The new window name is returned as a result 2 The spectrogram is updated with each new sweep INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode Configuring the Spectrogram CALC SGR CLE Clears the displayed spectrogra...

Page 707: ...imum level for the same frequency the marker is currently positioned at in all frames CALC MARK2 SGR XY MAX Sets marker 2 to the maximum level in the entire spectrogram CALC DELT1 SGR FRAM 3s Sets the deltamarker 1 to the frame captured 3 seconds after marker 1 By default it is set to the peak of that frame and displays the level difference to marker 1 Note the positive value CALC DELT1 MIN Sets d...

Page 708: ...ame the power level and frequency at each sweep point are returned TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieves the trace data for the selected frame only 8 8 8 Working with Markers The commands required to work with markers and marker functions in a remote envi ronment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in Chap ter 7 9 Marker Usage on page 421 In the Spectrum application markers are id...

Page 709: ...712 CALCulate n MARKer m AOFF 712 CALCulate n MARKer m LINK TO MARKer m 712 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe 713 CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe 713 CALCulate n MARKer m X 714 CALCulate n DELTamarker m AOFF This command turns off all delta markers Suffix n Window m irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns off all delta markers Usage Event CALCulate n DELTamarker m LINK State This command links delta marker m ...

Page 710: ... TO MARK2 ON Links the delta marker 4 to the marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 427 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MODE Mode This command defines whether the position of a delta marker is provided as an abso lute value or relative to a reference marker Note that when the position of a delta marker is queried the result is always an abso lute value see CALCulate n DELTamarke...

Page 711: ...e n DELTamarker m STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 425 See Marker Type on page 426 See Select Marker on page 427 CALCulate ...

Page 712: ...o change the delta marker mode with CALCulate n DELTamarker m MODE on page 710 A query returns the absolute position of the delta marker Range The value range and unit depend on the measure ment and scale of the x axis Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 4 on page 357 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 on page 361 Se...

Page 713: ...marker number is cur rently active as a delta marker it is turned into a normal marker Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 425 See Marker Type on page 426 See Select Marker on page 427 CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe Trace This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the c...

Page 714: ...cy domain or s time domain or dB statistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 254 See Marker Peak List on page 254 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 4 on page 357 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 on page 361 See Marker Position X value on page 426 8 8 8 2 General Marker...

Page 715: ...er information in the diagrams RST 1 Example DISP MINF OFF Hides the marker information Manual operation See Marker Info on page 429 CALCulate n MARKer m X SSIZe StepSize This command selects the marker step size mode for all markers in all windows The step size defines the distance the marker moves when you move it with the rotary knob It therefore takes effect in manual operation only Suffix n m...

Page 716: ...all windows Suffix n m irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK LOEX ON Manual operation See Exclude LO on page 431 CALCulate n MARKer m PEXCursion Excursion This command defines the peak excursion for all markers in all windows The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak search The unit depends on the measurement Application Result displa...

Page 717: ...ommand defines the left limit of the marker search range for all markers in all windows If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Suffix n m irrelevant Parameters SearchLimit The value range depends on the frequency range or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST left diagram...

Page 718: ...e 285 See Left Limit Right Limit on page 342 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits ZOOM STATe State This command adjusts the marker search range to the zoom area for all markers in all windows Suffix n m irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC MARK X SLIM ZOOM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual o...

Page 719: ...kers 719 Positioning Delta Markers 723 Positioning Normal Markers The following commands position markers on the trace CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum AUTO 719 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum LEFT 720 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NEXT 720 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK 720 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHt 721 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum AUTO 721 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT 721 CALCulate n MA...

Page 720: ...sition remains the same Suffix n Window m Marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 436 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Suffix n Window m Marker Usage Event Manual op...

Page 721: ...al operation See Search Next Peak on page 436 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum AUTO State This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace minimum on and off The R S FPL1000 performs the peak search after each sweep Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC MARK MIN AUTO ON Activates the automatic minimum value search function for marker 1 at the end of each...

Page 722: ...Search Next Minimum on page 437 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Suffix n Window m Marker Usage Event Manual operation Se...

Page 723: ...marker m MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Suffix n Window m Marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Pea...

Page 724: ...rement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Suffix n Window m Marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 436 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher mini...

Page 725: ...ted frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Suffix n Window m Marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 437 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker po...

Page 726: ...er RESult on page 749 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer RESult on page 748 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown RESult on page 752 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency on page 751 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor on page 752 CALCulate n MARKer m COUNt FREQuency on page 755 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving marker results CALCulate n DELTamarker m X RELative 726 CA...

Page 727: ...suring function or result display Output unit DBM DBPW DBUV DBMV DBUA dB lin log WATT VOLT AMPere dB lin log Suffix m Marker n Window Return values Result Result at the position of the delta marker The unit is variable and depends on the one you have currently set Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marke...

Page 728: ...ically define the marker and delta marker position in the spectrogram The usage of these markers is demonstrated in Chapter 8 8 7 6 Programming Exam ple Configuring a Spectrogram on page 706 Using Markers The following commands control spectrogram markers Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere The following commands define the horizontal position of the markers CALCulate n MAR...

Page 729: ...MINimum ABOVe 732 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe 732 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum BELow 732 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow 732 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum NEXT 732 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT 732 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum PEAK 733 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK 733 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam FRAMe ...

Page 730: ...rea on page 434 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram Suffix n Window m Marker Usage Event CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam XY MINimum PEAK CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram Suffix n Window m Marker Us...

Page 731: ...ALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Suffix n Window m Marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 433 CALCulate n MARKer...

Page 732: ... Y MINimum BELow CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Suffix n Window m Marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 433 C...

Page 733: ...ALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT on page 723 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 723 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 724 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHt on page 724 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum LEFT on page 724 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 725 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 725 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt on ...

Page 734: ...er m SGRam FRAMe Frame Time CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram FRAMe Frame Time This command positions a delta marker on a particular frame The frame is relative to the position of marker 1 The command is available for the spectrogram Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Time ...

Page 735: ... quencies Suffix n Window m Marker Usage Event CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MINimum PEAK CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram over all frequencies Suffix n Window m Marker Usage Event CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe This command move...

Page 736: ... MAXimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next higher level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Suffix n Window m Marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 433 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXi...

Page 737: ...mum BELow This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Suffix n Window m Marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 433 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MINimum NEXT CALCulate n...

Page 738: ...EAK 738 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X 738 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y 739 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y OFFSet 739 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed STATe 739 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK This command moves the fixed reference marker to the peak power Suffix n Window m Marker Example CALC DELT FUNC...

Page 739: ...erence may be anywhere in the diagram Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters RefPoint Numeric value that defines the vertical position of the reference The unit and value range is variable RST Fixed Reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to 10 dBm Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 429 See Defining Reference Point on ...

Page 740: ...ker Peak Lists Useful commands for peak lists described elsewhere CALCulate n MARKer m PEXCursion on page 716 MMEMory STORe n PEAK on page 812 Chapter 8 8 8 3 Configuring and Performing a Marker Search on page 716 Remote commands exclusive to peak lists CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe 740 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt 741 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEak...

Page 741: ...fix n m irrelevant Return values NumberOfPeaks Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE COUN Queries the number of peaks Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate Peaks This command initiates a peak search Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Peaks This parameter defines the number of peaks to find during the search Note that the actual number of peaks found during the search also depends o...

Page 742: ...ber of Peaks on page 456 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks SORT SortMode This command selects the order in which the results of a peak search are returned Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters SortMode X Sorts the peaks according to increasing position on the x axis Y Sorts the peaks according to decreasing position on the y axis RST X Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT Y Sets the sort mode to decre...

Page 743: ...he order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks SORT Suffix n m irrelevant Return values PeakPosition Position of the peaks on the y axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only 8 8 8 9 Noise Measurement Marker The following commands control the noise measurement marker function CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NOISe RESult 743 CALCulate n M...

Page 744: ... m FUNCtion NOISe STATe State This command turns the noise measurement at the marker position on and off Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC MARK FUNC NOIS ON Switches on the noise measurement Manual operation See Noise Measurement State on page 442 See Switching All Noise Measurement Off on page 442 8 8 8 10 Phase Noise Measurement Marker The following commands...

Page 745: ... PNO AUTO ON Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in a phase noise measurement Manual operation See Defining Reference Point on page 445 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise RESult This command queries the result of a phase noise measurement If necessary the command activates the measurement first This command is only available in the Spectrum application Suffix n Windo...

Page 746: ...ers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm Manual operation See Phase Noise Measurement State on page 444 See Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off on page 445 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise RESult This command queries the result of a phase noise measurement in the Analog Demod ulation a...

Page 747: ...r RESult 748 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN 748 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe 748 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer MODE Mode This command selects the way the results for a band power marker are displayed Note relative power results are only availabe for delta markers see CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer MODE on page 749 Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Mode ...

Page 748: ...Bm Hz Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN Span This command defines the bandwidth around the marker position Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Span Frequency The maximum span depends on the marker position and R S FPL1000 model RST 5 of current span Default unit Hz Example CALC MARK FUNC BPOW SPAN 2MHz Measures the band power over 2 MHz around the marker Manual operation S...

Page 749: ...Parameters Mode POWer Result is displayed as an absolute power The power unit depends on the CALCulate n UNIT POWer setting DENSity Result is displayed as a density in dBm Hz RPOWer This setting is only available for a delta band power marker The result is the difference between the absolute power in the band around the delta marker and the absolute power for the reference marker The powers are su...

Page 750: ...command turns delta markers for band power measurements on and off If neccessary the command also turns on a reference marker Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Band Power Measurement State on page 450 See Switching All Band Power Measurements Off on page 451 8 8 8 12 n dB Down Marker The following commands control the n dB down markers CALCulate n MARK...

Page 751: ...ARK FUNC NDBD 3dB Sets the distance to the reference marker to 3 dB CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x axis when mea suring in the frequency domain To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible fo...

Page 752: ... Suffix n m irrelevant Return values QFactor Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown RESult This command queries the distance of the n dB down markers from each other To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinu...

Page 753: ...the n dB Down marker on Manual operation See n dB down Marker State on page 447 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown TIME This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x axis when mea suring in the time domain To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible ...

Page 754: ... the frequency counter at the marker position on and off The frequency counter works for one marker only If you perform a frequency count with another marker the R S FPL1000 deactivates the frequency count of the first marker To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for s...

Page 755: ...s Frequency Frequency at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK ON Switches on marker 2 CALC MARK COUN ON Activates the frequency counter for marker 1 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK COUN FREQ Outputs the measured value of marker 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Signal Count Marker State on page 439 CALCulate n MARKer m COUN...

Page 756: ...757 SENSe DEMod SQUelch STATe 758 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation CONTinuous State This command turns continuous demodulation of the signal at the marker position in the frequency domain on and off In the time domain continuous demodulation is always on Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC2 MARK3 FUNC DEM CONT ON Switches on the continuous demodulation...

Page 757: ...n page 453 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation STATe State This command turns the audio demodulator on and off when the measurement rea ches a marker position Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC MARK3 FUNC DEM ON Switches on the demodulation for marker 3 Manual operation See Marker Demodulation State on page 452 SENSe DEMod SQUelch LEVel Threshold This co...

Page 758: ... Example Basic Markers 758 Example Marker Search in Spectrograms 760 Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Examples 761 Example Using a Fixed Reference Marker 761 Example Obtaining a Marker Peak List 761 Example Measuring Noise Density 762 Example Measuring Phase Noise 762 Example Measuring the Power in a Channel Using Band Power Markers 763 Example Measuring Characteristic Bandwid...

Page 759: ... to the freq 150 MHz on trace 1 CALC MARK4 TRAC 4 Activates marker 4 and sets it to the peak of trace 4 CALC MARK1 MAX AUTO ON Moves M1 to the current peak of trace 1 after each sweep CALC MARK2 MAX NEXT Moves M2 to the next lower peak of trace 2 CALC DELT5 ON CALC DELT5 LINK ON Activates delta marker 5 and links it to marker 1 If M1 moves so does D5 CALC DELT5 MREF 4 Changes the reference for D5 ...

Page 760: ...t marker1 on the peak power in the most recent spectrum and query its position CALC2 SPEC FRAM SEL 0 CALC2 MARK1 ON CALC2 MARK1 X CALC2 MARK1 Y Set marker2 on the peak power in frame at 324ms and query its position CALC2 MARK2 ON CALC2 MARK2 SGR FRAM 324ms CALC2 MARK2 X CALC2 MARK2 Y Set marker3 on peak power level in the entire spectrogram in memory and query its position CALC2 MARK3 ON CALC2 MAR...

Page 761: ...es that the basic frequency sweep described in Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Exam ples on page 761 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument Configuring the reference marker Activate a fixed reference marker It is set to the current maximum of trace 1 CALC DELT FUNC FIX ON Set the reference frequency to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ ...

Page 762: ...E COUN CALC MARK FUNC FPE X CALC MARK FUNC FPE Y Exporting the peak list MMEM STOR PEAK PeakList Example Measuring Noise Density This example demonstrates how to measure noise density using noise markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment It assumes that the basic fre quency sweep described in Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Func tion Examples on page 761 has been...

Page 763: ... noise results CALC DELT1 FUNC PNO RES CALC DELT2 FUNC PNO RES CALC DELT3 FUNC PNO RES CALC DELT4 FUNC PNO RES Queries the difference in level between the peak and the noise power density measured at the deltamarkers referred to the carrier power level dBc Example Measuring the Power in a Channel Using Band Power Markers This example demonstrates how to measure the power in a specific channel or b...

Page 764: ...t to be a density power per Hz bandwidth Retrieving Results CALC MARK1 FUNC BPOW RES Returns the power sum for the specified bandwidth around marker 1 CALC DELT2 FUNC BPOW RES Returns the power sum for the specified bandwidth around deltamarker 2 CALC DELT3 FUNC BPOW RES Returns the power sum for the specified bandwidth around deltamarker 3 Example Measuring Characteristic Bandwidths Using the n d...

Page 765: ... Sweep on page 629 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument Audio output is provided for 5s each time the signal reaches its initial maximum how ever only if it is higher than 90 dBm 10 of the total y axis range in order to ignore noise Configuring the marker demodulation CALC MARK1 ON Activates marker1 and sets it to the maximum power level CALC MARK1 FUNC DEM SEL F...

Page 766: ...Using the Sig nal Count Marker This example demonstrates how to determine highly accurate frequency values using signal count markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in Chapter 8 6 14 Programming Example Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep on page 629 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument C...

Page 767: ...late n TLINe k STATe 769 CALCulate n DLINe k Position This command defines the vertical position of a display line Suffix n Window k Limit line Parameters Position The value range is variable You can use any unit you want the R S FPL1000 then converts the unit to the currently selected unit If you omit a unit the R S FPL1000 uses the currently selected unit RST state is OFF Example CALC DLIN2 20dB...

Page 768: ... frequency line 2 to a frequency of 120 MHz Manual operation See Vertical Line 1 Vertical Line 2 on page 490 CALCulate n FLINe k STATe State This command turns a frequency line on and off Suffix n Window k Limit line Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC FLIN2 STAT ON Turns frequency line 2 on CALCulate n TLINe k Time This command defines the position of a time line Suffix n Window k Limi...

Page 769: ...nce for the y values for both upper and lower limit lines Configuring Limit Lines 769 Managing Limit Lines 779 Checking the Results of a Limit Check 781 Programming Example Using Limit Lines 782 Configuring Limit Lines CALCulate n LIMit k COMMent 770 CALCulate n LIMit k CONTrol DATA 770 CALCulate n LIMit k CONTrol DOMain 770 CALCulate n LIMit k CONTrol MODE 771 CALCulate n LIMit k CONTrol OFFSet 7...

Page 770: ...ne Manual operation See Comment on page 499 CALCulate n LIMit k CONTrol DATA LimitLinePoints This command defines the horizontal definition points of a limit line Suffix n irrelevant k Limit line Parameters LimitLinePoints Variable number of x axis values Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as the number of vertical values set with CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer DATA or CALCula...

Page 771: ...mit line Parameters Mode ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values Hz or s RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the center fre quency frequency domain or the left diagram border time domain RST ABSolute CALCulate n LIMit k CONTrol OFFSet Offset This command defines an offset for a complete limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not ac...

Page 772: ...imit lines from one horizontal point to the next Suffix n Window k Limit line Parameters InterpolMode LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Example CALC LIM CONT SPAC LIN Manual operation See X Axis on page 500 CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer DATA LimitLinePoints This command defines the vertical definition points of a lower limit line Suffix n irrelevant k Limit line Parameters LimitLinePoints Variable number of ...

Page 773: ...E Mode This command selects the vertical limit line scaling Suffix n Window k Limit line Parameters Mode ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values The unit is variable RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference level dB RST ABSolute Manual operation See X Axis on page 500 CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer OFFSet Offset This command defines an offset for a c...

Page 774: ...e unit depends on CALCulate n LIMit k UNIT on page 775 Manual operation See Shift y on page 501 CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer SPACing InterpolType This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of a lower limit line from one horizontal point to the next Suffix n Window k Limit line Parameters InterpolType LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Manual operation See Y Axis on page 500 ...

Page 775: ...eters Threshold Numeric value The unit depends on CALCulate n LIMit k UNIT on page 775 RST 200 dBm Manual operation See Threshold on page 499 CALCulate n LIMit k NAME Name This command selects a limit line that already exists or defines a name for a new limit line Suffix n Window k Limit line Parameters Name String containing the limit line name RST REM1 to REM8 for lines 1 to 8 Manual operation S...

Page 776: ...umber of vertical values has to be the same as the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate n LIMit k CONTrol DATA If not the R S FPL1000 either adds missing values or ignores surplus values The unit depends on CALCulate n LIMit k UNIT on page 775 RST Limit line state is OFF Manual operation See Data Points on page 500 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer MARGin Margin This command defines an area arou...

Page 777: ...fset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points Suffix n irrelevant k Limit line Parameters Offset Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Y Offset on page 498 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer SHIFt Distance This command moves a complete upper limit line vertically Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value y...

Page 778: ...you can use the command you have to select a limit line with CALCulate n LIMit k NAME on page 775 Suffix n irrelevant k Limit line Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Visibility on page 497 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer THReshold Limit This command defines an absolute limit for limit lines with a relative scale The R S FPL1000 uses the threshold for the limit check if the limit line...

Page 779: ...t k ACTive This command queries the names of all active limit lines Suffix n k irrelevant Return values LimitLines String containing the names of all active limit lines in alphabeti cal order Example CALC LIM ACT Queries the names of all active limit lines Usage Query only Manual operation See Visibility on page 497 CALCulate n LIMit k COPY Line This command copies a limit line Suffix n Window k L...

Page 780: ...at a new command exists to activate the limit check and define the trace to be checked in one step see CALCulate n LIMit k TRACe t CHECk on page 780 Suffix n irrelevant k Limit line Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC LIM STAT ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 1 Manual operation See Disable All Lines on page 498 CALCulate n LIMit k TRACe t CHECk State This command turns the ...

Page 781: ...t see Chapter 7 11 2 4 Reference Limit Line File Format on page 506 Suffix n irrelevant Parameters FileName String containing the path and name of the target file LimitLineName Name of the limit line to be exported Example MMEM STOR LIM C TEST UpperLimitLine Stores the limit line named UpperLimitLine in the file TEST CSV Manual operation See Export on page 501 Checking the Results of a Limit Check...

Page 782: ... for its end CALC2 LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 in window 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Limit Check n on page 305 See Limit Check on page 334 Programming Example Using Limit Lines The following examples demonstrate how to work with limit lines in a remote environ ment Example Configuring Limit Lines 782 Example Performing a Limit Check 783 Example Configurin...

Page 783: ...tion points for limit line 3 CALC LIM3 LOW 90 60 40 60 90 Defines 5 definition points relative to the reference level for limit line 3 CALC LIM3 LOW SHIF 2 Shifts the limit line 3 by 2dB CALC LIM3 LOW OFFS 3 Defines an additional 3 dB offset for limit line 3 CALC LIM3 LOW THR 200DBM Defines a power threshold of 200dBm that must be exceeded for limit to be checked CALC LIM3 LOW MARG 5dB Defines an ...

Page 784: ... MODE MAXH Configures 3 traces 1 default clear write 2 average 3 max hold Configuring the limit check MMEM LOAD TYPE REPL MMEM LOAD STAT 1 LimitLines_FM1_FM3 Loads the limit lines stored in LimitLines_FM1_FM3 CALC LIM1 NAME FM1 CALC LIM1 UPP STAT ON Activates upper limit FM1 as line 1 CALC LIM3 NAME FM3 CALC LIM3 LOW STAT ON Activates lower limit line FM3 as line 3 CALC LIM ACT Queries the names o...

Page 785: ...hey also comply with Windows conventions Windows file names do not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase notation Wildcards The two characters and can be used as wildcards i e they are variables for a selection of several files The question mark replaces exactly one character the asterisk replaces any of the remaining characters in the file name thus means all files in a directory Path names...

Page 786: ...ectory 792 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator Separator This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters Separator COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See Saving t...

Page 787: ...Analyzer user whose names start with SPOOL have 6 letters and the exten sion PNG e g SPOOL1 PNG SPOOL2 PNG SPOOL3 PNG Example MMEM CAT C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user SPOOL6 Query whether the file SPOOL6 PNG also exists in the directory Result 256 File name not found MMEMory CATalog C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user SPOOL6 PNG Usage Query only Manual operati...

Page 788: ...ng containing the comment Example MMEMory COMMent ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from 23 05 MMEMory MMEMory STORe1 STATe 1 ACP_T As a result in the selection list for recall settings the comment ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from 23 05 is added to the ACP entry Manual operation See Comment on page 105 MMEMory COPY SourceFile DestinationFile This command copies one or more files to anoth...

Page 789: ...lic User Testfile txt Creates a new file called testfile txt MMEM DATA Testfile txt 220Contents of the file The parameter means 2 hash sign and length of the length information 20 bytes 2 digits 20 indicates the number of subsequent binary data bytes Contents of the file store 20 binary bytes characters to the file MMEMory DELete FileName This command deletes a file Parameters FileName String cont...

Page 790: ... Z String containing the device drive name RST n a MMEMory NAME FileName This command has several purposes depending on the context it is used in It creates a new and empty file It defines the file name for screenshots taken with HCOPy IMMediate device Note that you have to route the printer output to a file Parameters FileName String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM NA...

Page 791: ... the share name of the drive host name or IP address share name UserName String containing a user name in the network The user name is optional Password String containing the password corresponding to the User Name The password is optional Reconnect ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Reconnects at logon with the same user name OFF 0 Does not reconnect at logon Usage Event MMEMory NETWork UNUSeddrives This command re...

Page 792: ...he configuration file Depending on the used command either the items from the entire instrument MMEMory SELect ITEM or only those from the currently selected channel setup MMEM SELect CHANnel ITEM are stored MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM ALL 793 MMEMory SELect ITEM ALL 793 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM DEFault 793 MMEMory SELect ITEM DEFault 793 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM HWSettings 793 MMEMory SELec...

Page 793: ...ly item to store to and load from a configuration file Usage Event Manual operation See Items on page 105 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM HWSettings State MMEMory SELect ITEM HWSettings State This command includes or excludes measurement hardware settings when storing or loading a configuration file Measurement settings include general channel configuration measurement hardware configuration including...

Page 794: ...tion file Hardware configuration MMEMory SELect ITEM HWSettings Limit lines MMEMory SELect ITEM LINes ALL Spectrogram data MMEMory SELect ITEM SGRam Trace data MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe ACTive Transducers MMEMory SELect ITEM TRANsducer ALL Example MMEM SEL NONE Usage Event Manual operation See Items on page 105 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM SPECtrogram State MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM SGRam State M...

Page 795: ...oring or loading a con figuration file Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example MMEM SEL TRAN ALL ON Manual operation See Items on page 105 See Save on page 153 8 9 3 Storing and Loading Instrument Settings See also INSTrument SELect on page 529 to select the channel setup MMEMory CLEar ALL 795 MMEMory CLEar STATe 796 MMEMory LOAD AUTO 796 MMEMory LOAD STATe 796 MMEMory STORe n STATe 797 MMEMory ...

Page 796: ...iguration file Note that only instrument settings files can be selected for the startup recall function channel setup files cause an error Example MMEM LOAD AUTO 1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user TEST Usage Event Manual operation See Startup Recall on page 106 MMEMory LOAD STATe 1 FileName This command restores and activates the instrument configuration stored in a dfl file No...

Page 797: ...lic Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user TEST01 Reloads all items In the Recall dialog select only User Settings and All Limit Lines MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user TEST01 Reloads user settings and all limit lines RST Reset instrument MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user TEST01 Selected items are retained Reloads user settings...

Page 798: ...Save Saves the current instrument settings in the file Save dfl MMEM STOR STAT NEXT Saves the current instrument settings in the file Save_001 dfl MMEM STOR STAT NEXT Saves the current instrument settings in the file Save_002 dfl Usage Event Manual operation See Save File on page 105 MMEMory STORe n TYPE Mode This command defines whether the data from the entire instrument or only from the current...

Page 799: ...sage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel Setup on page 231 8 9 4 Storing or Printing Screenshots Useful commands to configure screenshots described elsewhere MMEMory NAME on page 790 Remote commands exclusive to configuring screenshots DISPlay LOGO 800 HCOPy ABORt 800 HCOPy CONTent 800 HCOPy CMAP item DEFault colors 801 HCOPy CMAP item HSL 802 HCOPy CMAP item PDEFined 802 HCOPy DESTination d...

Page 800: ...STem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT 810 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect device 810 DISPlay LOGO State Activates deactivates the printout of the Rohde Schwarz company logo at the top of each page Parameters State 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON Logo is printed 0 OFF Logo is not printed RST 1 Example DISP LOGO OFF Manual operation See Print Logo on page 113 HCOPy ABORt This command aborts a running hardcopy o...

Page 801: ...channel setup or MultiView diagrams traces mark ers marker lists limit lines etc including the channel setup bar and status bar for printout on a single page Displayed items belonging to the software user interface e g softkeys are not included The size and position of the elements in the printout is identical to the screen display RST HCOPy Example HCOP DEST1 SYST COMM CLIP HCOP CONT WIND HCOP DE...

Page 802: ... color scheme is to be defined For more information see Chapter 8 10 4 3 CMAP Suffix Assignment on page 829 Parameters Color hue tint sat saturation lum brightness The value range is 0 to 1 for all parameters Example HCOP CMAP2 HSL 0 3 0 8 1 0 Changes the grid color HCOPy CMAP item PDEFined Color This command selects a predefined color for various screen elements in print jobs Suffix item Selects ...

Page 803: ...N Sends the hardcopy to a printer You can select the printer withSYSTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect device SYST COMM CLIP Sends the hardcopy to the clipboard The format should be WEMF RST SYST COMM CLIP Manual operation See Destination on page 116 HCOPy DEVice COLor State This command turns color printing on and off Parameters State ON 1 Color printing OFF 0 Black and white printing RST 1 Example H...

Page 804: ...Py IMMediate device This command initiates a print job If you are printing to a file the file name depends on MMEMory NAME Suffix device 1 2 Irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Print on page 115 HCOPy IMMediate device NEXT This command initiates a print job If you are printing to a file the file name depends on MMEMory NAME This command adds a consecutive number to the file name Suffix dev...

Page 805: ... the printout page on which no ele ments are printed The margins are defined according to HCOPy PAGE MARGin device UNIT on page 806 Suffix device 1 2 Irrelevant Parameters Margin numeric value RST 4 23 mm Example HCOP PAGE MARG2 BOTT 2 Manual operation See Margins on page 119 HCOPy PAGE MARGin device LEFT Margin This command defines the margin at the left side of the printout page on which no ele ...

Page 806: ...rgins on page 119 HCOPy PAGE MARGin device TOP Margin This command defines the margin at the top of the printout page on which no elements are printed The margins are defined according to HCOPy PAGE MARGin device UNIT on page 806 Suffix device 1 2 Irrelevant Parameters Margin numeric value RST 4 23 mm Example HCOP PAGE MARG2 TOP 2 Manual operation See Margins on page 119 HCOPy PAGE MARGin device U...

Page 807: ...ice CHANnel STATe ChannelName State This command selects all windows of the specified channel setup to be included in the printout for HCOP CONT WIND Suffix device 1 2 Irrelevant Parameters ChannelName String containing the name of the channel setup For a list of available channel setup types use INSTrument LIST on page 528 State 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON The channel setup windows are included in the printo...

Page 808: ...ice 1 2 Irrelevant Parameters Mode 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON Each window is scaled to fit the page size optimally not regard ing the aspect ratio of the original display If more than one win dow is printed on one page see HCOPy PAGE WINDow device COUNt on page 808 each window is prin ted in equal size Size to fit 0 OFF Each window is printed as large as possible while maintaining the aspect ratio of the ori...

Page 809: ...ow is included in the printout 0 OFF The window is not included in the printout RST 1 Example HCOP PAGE WIND2 STAT IQ Analyzer 1 1 Manual operation See Print Multiple Windows on page 113 HCOPy TDSTamp STATe device State This command includes or excludes the time and date in the printout Suffix device 1 2 Irrelevant Parameters State 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON The time and date are printed 0 OFF The time and d...

Page 810: ...y several times until no more printers could be found In that case the return value is an empty string Further queries after the empty string result in an error Usage Query only Manual operation See Printer Name on page 117 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect device PrinterName This command selects the printer that processes jobs sent by the R S FPL1000 Use HCOPy DESTination device to select another...

Page 811: ...Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 515 for details Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Manual operation See Include Instrument Measurement Settings on page 513 FORMat DEXPort TRACes Selection This command selects the data to be included in a data export file see MMEMory STORe n TRACe on page 813 For details on exporting data see Chapter 7 13 1 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 512 Para...

Page 812: ...containing the path name and extension of the target file Example MMEM STOR PEAK test dat Saves the current marker peak list in the file test dat Usage Event Manual operation See Export Peak List on page 456 MMEMory STORe n SGRam FileName MMEMory STORe n SPECtrogram FileName This command exports spectrogram data to an ASCII file The file contains the data for every frame in the history buffer The ...

Page 813: ... an ASCII file For details on the file format see Chapter 7 13 4 Reference ASCII File Export For mat on page 515 Suffix n Window Setting parameters Trace Number of the trace to be stored This parameter is ignored if the option Export all Traces and all Table Results is activated in the Export configuration settings see FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 811 FileName String containing the path and name ...

Page 814: ...reates the file Test001 txt and writes 12 characters to it Copying the data to another location MMEM COPY C R_S INSTR USER Results Test001 txt Q Copies the specified file to network drive Q MMEM DEL C R_S INSTR USER Results Test001 txt Deletes the specified file from the instrument hard disk or MMEM MOVE C R_S INSTR USER Results Test001 xml Q TestResults txt Moves the file Test001 txt to drive Q r...

Page 815: ...ctrum dfl to a new Spectrum2 channel setup MEMM LOAD TYPE NEW Specifies that settings will be loaded to a new channel besides the existing Spectrum channel MMEM SEL CHAN HWS ON Selects only hardware settings to be loaded MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C R_S Instr user Spectrum Loads the channel specific settings from the file C R_S Instr user Spectrum dfl to a new channel The new channel is named Spectrum2 to a...

Page 816: ... EXT FREQ 13MHZ SENSe ROSCillator SOURce Source This command selects the reference oscillator If you want to select the external reference it must be connected to the R S FPL1000 Parameters Source INTernal The internal reference is used 10 MHz EXTernal The external reference from the REF INPUT 10 MHZ connector is used if none is available an error flag is displayed in the sta tus bar Example ROSC ...

Page 817: ...data is completed the MAV bit in the status byte can be used If the associated bit is set in the Service Request Enable SRE register the instrument generates a service request after the acquisition of correction data has been completed Return values CalibrationState 0 The command returns a 0 if calibration was successful Example CLS Resets the status management SRE 16 Enables MAV bit in the Servic...

Page 818: ...frequency 25 MHz RST 50 MHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See Calibration Frequency RF on page 145 DIAGnostic SERVice INPut RF SPECtrum Bandwidth This command selects the bandwidth of the calibration signal Parameters Bandwidth NARRowband Narrowband signal for power calibration of the frontend BROadband Broadband signal for calibration of the IF filter DIAGnostic SERVice INPut SELect Signal Thi...

Page 819: ...he stored self alignment temperature by a certain degree a warning is displayed in the status bar indicating the resulting deviation in the measured power lev els A status bit in the STATUs QUEStionable TEMPerature register indicates a possible deviation Return values Temperature Temperature in degrees Celsius Example SOUR TEMP FRON Queries the temperature of the frontend sensor Usage Query only 8...

Page 820: ... transducer storage directory data for the individual files is lis ted The result is a comma separated list of values with the following syntax UsedMem FreeMem FileSize FileName FileSize FileName Return values UsedMem numeric value in bytes Amount of storage space required by all transducers files in the C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL trd directory sum of all individual FileSize values FreeMe...

Page 821: ... ascending order Level The unit for Level depends on SENSe CORRection TRANsducer UNIT Example SENSe1 CORRection TRANsducer UNIT DB Frequency Span 0 Hz to 4 Ghz SENSe1 CORRection TRANsducer DATA 0 8 2e6 5 4GHz 3 Creates the transducer points Manual operation See Data Points on page 153 Frequency Level 0 Hz 8 dB 2 GHz 5 dB 4 GHz 3 dB SENSe CORRection TRANsducer DELete This command deletes the curren...

Page 822: ...1 See Name on page 152 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer STATe State This command turns the selected transducer factor on or off Before you can use the command you have to select a transducer Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Activating Deactivating on page 150 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer UNIT Unit This command selects the unit of the transducer factor Before you can use the command...

Page 823: ...o an ASCII CSV file For details on the file format see Chapter 6 3 6 3 Reference Transducer Factor File Format on page 154 Suffix n irrelevant Parameters FileName String containing the path and name of the target file TransdName Name of the transducer factor to be exported Example MMEM STOR TFAC C TEST Transducer1 Stores the transducer factor named Transducer1 in the file TEST CSV Manual operation...

Page 824: ...BAR STATe 825 DISPlay TOUChscreen STATe 825 DISPlay WINDow TIME 826 DISPlay WINDow TIME FORMat 826 SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe 826 DISPlay ANNotation CBAR State This command hides or displays the channel bar information Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DISP ANN CBAR OFF Manual operation See Channel Bar on page 129 DISPlay BLIGhting Brightness Changes the brightness of the display in eight...

Page 825: ...BAR OFF Manual operation See Status Bar on page 129 DISPlay SKEYs STATe State This command turns the softkey bar on and off Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DISP SKEY OFF Manual operation See Softkey Bar on page 129 DISPlay TBAR STATe State This command turns the toolbar on or off Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example DISP TOOL ON Manual operation See Toolbar on page 128 DISPlay TOUCh...

Page 826: ...he date and time from the display Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example DISP TIME ON Manual operation See Date and Time on page 129 DISPlay WINDow TIME FORMat Format This command selects the time and date format Parameters Format DE dd mm yyyy hh mm ss 24 hour format US mm dd yyyy hh mm ss 12 hour format RST DE Example DISP TIME ON Switches the screen display of date and time on DISP TIME FORM...

Page 827: ...lusive to customize the display colors and themes DISPlay CMAP item DEFault colors 827 DISPlay CMAP item HSL 827 DISPlay CMAP item PDEFined 828 DISPlay THEMe CATalog 828 DISPlay THEMe SELect 828 DISPlay CMAP item DEFault colors This command resets the color scheme for the display Suffix item Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined colors 1 4 1 Current colors with a white backg...

Page 828: ...he item for which the color scheme is to be defined Parameters Color BLACk BLUE BROWn GREen CYAN RED MAGenta YELLow WHITe DGRAy LGRAy LBLUe LGREen LCYan LRED LMAGenta Example DISP CMAP2 PDEF GRE DISPlay THEMe CATalog This command queries all available display themes Return values Themes String containing all available display themes Example DISP THEMe CAT Usage Query only DISPlay THEMe SELect Them...

Page 829: ...tatus Error CMAP6 Text Special 1 CMAP7 Text Special 2 CMAP8 Trace 1 CMAP9 Trace 2 CMAP10 Trace 3 CMAP11 Marker Info Text CMAP12 Limit Lines CMAP13 Limit and Margin Check Pass CMAP14 Limit and Margin Check Fail CMAP15 Softkey Text CMAP16 Softkey Background CMAP17 Selected Field Text CMAP18 Selected Field Background CMAP19 Softkey 3D Bright Part CMAP20 Softkey 3D Dark Part CMAP21 Softkey State On CM...

Page 830: ... defined via the theme DISPlay THEMe SELect and are thus ignored in the SCPI command 8 10 5 Remote Commands for Language Settings SYSTem DISPlay LANGuage 830 SYSTem DISPlay LANGuage Language Defines the language of the software defined interface elements such as softkeys dialog boxes diagram texts etc Parameters Language EN ZH_CH ZH_TW JA KO RU ZH_CH Simplified Chinese ZH_TW Traditional Chinese RS...

Page 831: ... parameter factory default 20 Example SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 18 Manual operation See GPIB Address on page 202 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator Terminator This command selects the GPIB receive terminator Output of binary data from the instrument to the control computer does not require such a terminator change Parameters Terminator LFEOI EOI LFEOI According to the standard the terminator in AS...

Page 832: ...e R S FPL1000 displays a message box at the bottom of the screen that contains the most recent type of error and the command that caused the error Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example SYST ERR DISP ON Manual operation See Display Remote Errors on page 203 SYSTem IDENtify FACTory This command resets the query to IDN to its default value Usage Event Manual operation See Reset to Factory String ...

Page 833: ...r the R S FSV instrument are used Manual operation See Language on page 204 SYSTem LXI INFO This command queries the LXI settings Return values LXIInfo current version LXI class Computername MAC adress IP adress Auto MDIX String containing the current LXI parameters version LXIClass ComputerName MACAddress IPAddress AutoMDIX Usage Query only Manual operation See Current LXI Configuration on page 2...

Page 834: ...em REVision FACTory Resets the response to the REV query for the revision number to the factory default 8 10 7 Checking the System Configuration The following commands are required to check the system configuration on the R S FPL1000 Useful commands for obtaining system information described elsewhere DIAGnostic SERVice SINFo on page 840 Remote commands exclusive to obtaining system information DI...

Page 835: ...Attenuation 20 DB ATT40 Mechanical Attenuation 40 DB CAL Mechanical Calibration Source EATT Electrical Attenuation Bypass PREamp Preamplifier Bypass Return values Cycles Number of switching cycles Example DIAG INFO CCO CAL Usage Query only DIAGnostic SERVice BIOSinfo This command queries the BIOS version of the CPU board Return values BiosInformation String containing the BIOS version Example DIAG...

Page 836: ...ic SERVice VERSinfo This command queries information about the hardware and software components Return values Information String containing the version of hardware and software compo nents including the types of licenses for installed options Example DIAG SERV VERS Queries the version information Response Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor CLEar ALL This command deletes all contents of the System Messa...

Page 837: ...e currently active channel setup Return values Messages String containing all messages of the selected type for the speci fied channel setup Each message is separated by a comma and inserted in parentheses If no messages are available empty parentheses are returned Example SYST ERR EXT ALL Returns all messages for the currently active application e g Message 1 Message 2 Example SYST ERR EXT FAT Sp...

Page 838: ...or is returned For details on error queues see Chapter 6 4 1 7 Status Reporting System on page 182 Usage Query only SYSTem FIRMware UPDate This command starts a firmware update using the msi files in the selected directory The default path is D FW_UPDATE The path is changed via the MMEMory COMMent command To store the update files the MMEMory DATA command is used Only user accounts with administra...

Page 839: ...ESults DELete 840 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction RESults SAVE 840 DIAGnostic SERVice SINFo 840 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction ServiceFunction This command starts a service function The service functions are available after you have entered the level 1 or level 2 system password Parameters ServiceFunction String containing the ID of the service function The ID of the service function is made up out of ...

Page 840: ... data and a screenshot of the screen display if available As a result of this command the created file name including the drive and path is returned If you contact the Rohde Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send this file to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster Return values FileName String containing the drive path and file name of the created support fil...

Page 841: ...1 1 General Status Register Commands STATus PRESet 841 STATus QUEue NEXT 841 STATus PRESet This command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined value All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh i e all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected The ENABle part of the STATus OPER...

Page 842: ... contents of the CONDition section Suffix n Window Query parameters ChannelName String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only 8 11 3 Reading Out the EVENt Part For more information on the event part see Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 184 STATus OPERation EVENt STATus QUEStionable E...

Page 843: ...SumBit ChannelName These commands control the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to bere ported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Suffix n Window Parameters SumBit Range 0 ...

Page 844: ... SCPI Status Register on page 184 STATus OPERation PTRansition SumBit STATus QUEStionable PTRansition SumBit STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable EXTended PTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO PTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable LIMit n PTRansition SumBi...

Page 845: ... InstrWrite analyzer STAT OPER ENAB 32767 Set OPERation enable bit for all events CALL InstrWrite analyzer STAT OPER PTR 32767 Set appropriate OPERation Ptransition bits CALL InstrWrite analyzer STAT QUES ENAB 32767 Set questionable enable bits for all events CALL InstrWrite analyzer STAT QUES PTR 32767 Set appropriate questionable Ptransition bits CALL viEnableEvent analyzer VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ ...

Page 846: ...l events mbSession Write STAT QUES PTR 32767 Set appropriate questionable Ptransition bits Console WriteLine Wait on event Blocking mbSession EnableEvent MessageBasedSessionEventType ServiceRequest _ EventMechanism Queue Enable the event for service request Your command plase use here mbSession Write Your command Dim Status mbSession WaitOnEvent _ MessageBasedSessionEventType ServiceRequest SRQWai...

Page 847: ...y when using triggered measurements The following function calls are required Status viWaitOnEvent analyzer VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ SRQWaitTimeout VI_NULL VI_NULL Wait for service request user inputs are not possible during the waiting time IF status VI_SUCCESS THEN CALL Srq If SRQ is recognized subroutine for evaluation Sweep in first Spectrum Tab and query marker Dim Status mbSession WaitOnEvent _ ...

Page 848: ...en Debug Print Timeout Error Program aborted Output error message STOP Stop software Endif 8 11 7 3 Waiting Without Blocking the Keyboard and Mouse A frequent problem with remote control programs using Visual Basic is to insert waiting times without blocking the keyboard and the mouse If the program is to respond to user inputs also during a waiting time control over the program events during this...

Page 849: ...e Public SUB Srq ON ERROR GOTO noDevice No user existing CALL viReadSTB analyzer STB Serial poll read status byte IF STB 0 THEN This instrument has bits set in the STB SRQFOUND 1 IF STB AND 16 0 THEN CALL Outputqueue IF STB AND 4 0 THEN CALL ErrorQueueHandler IF STB AND 8 0 THEN CALL Questionablestatus IF STB AND 128 0 THEN CALL Operationstatus IF STB AND 32 0 THEN CALL Esrread END IF noDevice END...

Page 850: ...nalyzer result Debug Print Contents of Output Queue result END SUB REM REM Subroutine for the output queue Public Sub Outputqueue Reading the output buffer Try Dim result As String mbSession ReadString Console WriteLine Contents of Output Queue result Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try End Sub 8 11 7 6 Reading Error Messages REM Subroutine for reading the error queue Publ...

Page 851: ... Status Register Public SUB Operationstatus Oper SPACE 20 Preallocate blanks to text variable CALL InstrWrite analyzer STATus OPERation EVENt CALL InstrRead analyzer Oper Debug Print Operation Status Oper END SUB REM REM Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register Public Sub Questionablestatus Dim myQSR As String Nothing Try myQSR mbSession Query STATus QUEStionable EVENt Read QSR Conso...

Page 852: ...ed Output error message STOP Stop software END IF IF VAL Esr AND 64 0 THEN Debug Print User request IF VAL Esr AND 128 0 THEN Debug Print Power on END SUB REM REM Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register Public Sub Esrread Try Dim myESR As Short mbSession Query ESR Read ESR If myESR And 1 0 Then Console WriteLine Operation complete If myESR And 2 0 Then Console WriteLine Request Control...

Page 853: ...lines no lon ger need to be assigned to a trace explicitly The trace to be checked can be defined directly as a suffix in the new command to activate the limit check see CALCulate n LIMit k TRACe t CHECk on page 780 Suffix n Window k Limit line Parameters TraceNumber 1 to 6 RST 1 Example CALC LIM2 TRAC 3 Assigns limit line 2 to trace 3 DISPlay WINDow n STATe State This command changes the display ...

Page 854: ... is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see Chapter 8 7 1 Working with Win dows in the Display on page 632 The parameter values are the same as for LAYout ADD WINDow on page 632 Suffix n Window HCOPy ITEM ALL This command is maintained for compatibility reasons only It has no effect Usage Setting only Deprecated Commands ...

Page 855: ...ng agents contain substances such as solvents thinners acetone etc acids bases or other substances Solvents can damage the front panel labeling plastic parts or screens for example Never use cleaning agents to clean the outside of the instrument Use a soft dry lint free dust cloth instead Risk of instrument damage due to obstructed fans If the instrument is operated in dusty areas the fans become ...

Page 856: ...Maintenance R S FPL1000 856 User Manual 1178 3370 02 03 c If necessary remove any excess moisture with a dry soft cloth Cleaning ...

Page 857: ...easurement e g the settings no lon ger match the displayed results or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily Gray Information Information on the status of individual processing steps No color No errors No message displayed normal operation Green Measurement successful Some applications visualize that the measurement was successful by show ing a message If any error inform...

Page 858: ... system and can be queried with the command SYSTem ERRor The answer format of R S FPL1000 to the command is as follows error code error text with queue query remote control command concerned The indication of the remote control command with prefixed semicolon is optional Example The command TEST COMMAND generates the following answer to the query SYSTem ERRor 113 Undefined header TEST COMMAND Ther...

Page 859: ...tion If problems arise during measurement in remote operation try the following methods to solve them Incompleted sequential commands blocked remote channels If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R S FPL1000 is blocked for further commands In this case you...

Page 860: ...piLog txt Logging the commands may be extremely useful for debug purposes e g in order to find misspelled keywords in control programs However remember to turn off the log ging function after debugging to avoid unnecessary access to the hard drive and use of storage space 10 4 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Hints Power levels for low frequency signals not correct 860 Invalid trace display 860 Data ...

Page 861: ...oubleshooting or training purposes Type the instrument s host name or IP address in the address field of the browser on your PC for example http 10 113 10 203 The instrument home page welcome page opens Note This function can be deactivated for the instrument After a firmware update it is automatically activated again Web browser access to instrument fails If an error message Failed to connect to ...

Page 862: ...r messages are described in Chapter 10 1 Error Information on page 857 In addition our customer support centers are there to assist you in solving any prob lems that you may encounter with your R S FPL1000 We will find solutions more quickly and efficiently if you provide us with the information listed below System Configuration The System Configuration dialog box in the Setup menu provides inform...

Page 863: ...lect the error information and attach it to an email in which you describe the problem Send the email to the customer support address for your region as listed on the Internet http www customersupport rohde schwarz com Packing and transporting the instrument If the instrument needs to be transported or shipped observe the notes described in Chapter 4 1 1 1 Unpacking and Checking the Instrument on ...

Page 864: ...tion RATio 651 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE 651 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo 652 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo AUTO 652 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo RATio 652 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo TYPE 652 SENSe BWIDth RESolution 650 SENSe BWIDth RESolution AUTO 651 SENSe BWIDth RESolution RATio 651 SENSe BWIDth RESolution TYPE 651 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer ADJust RLEVel STATe 820 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer CATalog 820 SENSe CORRection TRAN...

Page 865: ...tive STOP FUNCtion 575 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass STATe 575 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range MLCalc 576 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range POINts MINimum VALue 576 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range RLEVel 577 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range SWEep TIME 577 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range SWEep TIME AUTO 578 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range TRANsducer 578 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range FREQuency...

Page 866: ... SENSe PMETer p FREQuency 675 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency LINK 676 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe 676 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage COUNt 677 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STATe 677 SENSe PMETer p ROFFset STATe 677 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger DTIMe 679 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HOLDoff 680 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HYSTeresis 680 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger LEVel 680 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger SLOPe 681 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger STATe...

Page 867: ... SPACing CHANnel ch 546 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel 546 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt 547 SENSe POWer BANDwidth 560 SENSe POWer BWIDth 560 SENSe POWer TRACe 541 SENSe ROSCillator SOURce 816 SENSe ROSCillator SOURce EAUTo 816 SENSe SWEep COUNt 653 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent 537 SENSe SWEep DURation 654 SENSe SWEep EGATe 667 SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff 667 SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGth 667 ...

Page 868: ...MINimum RIGHt 725 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK 725 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MODE 710 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MREF 711 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam FRAMe 734 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SARea 734 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK 735 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MINimum PEAK 735 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe 735 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGR...

Page 869: ...LIMit k ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe 552 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate ch ABSolute 553 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate ch ABSolute STATe 553 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate ch RESult 554 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate ch RELative 554 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate ch RELative STATe 555 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower STATe 555 CALCulate n LIMit k ACTive 779 CALCula...

Page 870: ...LCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer MODE 747 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer RESult 748 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN 748 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe 748 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CENTer 641 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CSTep 642 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation CONTinuous 756 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation HOLDoff 756 CALCulate n MARKer m ...

Page 871: ...ence 657 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion STRack BANDwidth 649 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion STRack THReshold 649 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion STRack TRACe 649 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion STRack STATe 648 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AOFF 603 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage 603 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN AVERage RESult 606 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMar...

Page 872: ...RKer m SGRam Y MINimum ABOVe 732 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum BELow 732 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum NEXT 732 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum PEAK 733 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram FRAMe 729 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram SARea 730 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK 730 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK 730 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y M...

Page 873: ...CALCulate n SGRam STATe 696 CALCulate n SPECtrogram CLEar IMMediate 694 CALCulate n SPECtrogram CONTinuous 694 CALCulate n SPECtrogram FRAMe COUNt 694 CALCulate n SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect 695 CALCulate n SPECtrogram HDEPth 695 CALCulate n SPECtrogram LAYout 696 CALCulate n SPECtrogram TSTamp DATA 696 CALCulate n SPECtrogram TSTamp STATe 697 CALCulate n SPECtrogram STATe 696 CALCulate n THReshold 7...

Page 874: ...Ram COLor STYLe 699 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor DEFault 698 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor LOWer 698 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe 699 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor UPPer 699 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor STYLe 699 DISPlay WINDow n STATe 853 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe X SPACing 642 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE 688 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE HCONtinuous 689 DISPlay W...

Page 875: ...ce TOP 806 HCOPy PAGE MARGin device UNIT 806 HCOPy PAGE ORIentation device 807 HCOPy PAGE WINDow device CHANnel STATe 807 HCOPy PAGE WINDow device COUNt 808 HCOPy PAGE WINDow device SCALe 808 HCOPy PAGE WINDow device STATe 808 HCOPy TDSTamp STATe device 809 HCOPy IMMediate device 804 HCOPy IMMediate device NEXT 804 INITiate n CONMeas 535 INITiate n CONTinuous 536 INITiate n ESPectrum 564 INITiate ...

Page 876: ...te 789 MMEMory LOAD AUTO 796 MMEMory LOAD STATe 796 MMEMory LOAD n LIMit 781 MMEMory LOAD n TFACtor 823 MMEMory MDIRectory 789 MMEMory MOVE 789 MMEMory MSIS 790 MMEMory NAME 790 MMEMory NETWork DISConnect 790 MMEMory NETWork MAP 791 MMEMory NETWork UNUSeddrives 791 MMEMory NETWork USEDdrives 791 MMEMory RDIRectory 792 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM ALL 793 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM DEFault 793 MMEM...

Page 877: ...n 842 STATus OPERation ENABle 843 STATus OPERation NTRansition 843 STATus OPERation PTRansition 844 STATus OPERation EVENt 842 STATus PRESet 841 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition 842 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle 843 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition 843 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition 844 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt 842 STATus QUEStionable CONDition 842 STATus QU...

Page 878: ...e PTRansition 844 STATus QUEStionable TIME CONDition 842 STATus QUEStionable TIME ENABle 843 STATus QUEStionable TIME NTRansition 844 STATus QUEStionable TIME PTRansition 844 STATus QUEStionable TIME EVENt 842 STATus QUEStionable EVENt 842 STATus QUEue NEXT 841 SYSTem CLOGging 525 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 831 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator 831 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMe...

Page 879: ...STem SPEaker VOLume 684 SYSTem SPEaker STATe 684 TRACe n COPY 693 TRACe n DATA 703 TRACe n DATA MEMory 704 TRACe n DATA X 705 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe 663 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME 663 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff 663 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis 664 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower 664 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower 665 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port 664 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe 66...

Page 880: ... display 389 Scaling 389 Settings 384 Analog Demodulation Application 82 Annotations Hiding restoring 129 AP trace information 66 Application cards 10 Application notes 10 Applications Analog Demodulation 82 Available 81 I Q Analyzer 82 Noise Figure 82 Setting 83 Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode 81 Spectrum 82 Arranging Windows 94 Arrow keys 39 ASCII trace export 515 Att channel setting 65 Attenu...

Page 881: ...ter frequency 377 Automatic configuration 420 Setting to marker 437 Softkey 377 Step size 375 378 381 Sub blocks Multi SEM 308 Channel bandwidth C N 280 CP ACLR 267 Channel Bandwidth OBW 285 Softkey 285 Channel bar Changing names 66 Information 63 Channel power Comparing CP ACLR 272 Density CP ACLR 265 SEM results 288 Settings SEM 309 Channel settings Display 63 65 Channel Setup Creating remote 52...

Page 882: ... Sequencer Softkey 88 Continuous sweep Softkey 234 401 480 Conventions SCPI commands 520 Copying Channel Setup remote 527 Traces 470 471 Coupling Span RBW 392 VBW RBW 392 Coupling ratio Span RBW remote 651 Coupling ratios Default 399 RBW VBW 398 Span RBW 398 CP ACLR 255 About 255 Absolute relative values 265 Adjust Settings 266 Channel bandwidths 267 Channel bandwidths remote control 544 Channel n...

Page 883: ...ions range 333 Trace 467 Device specific commands 171 DHCP 28 201 210 DHCP server LAN configuration 31 Diagram area Channel settings 65 Status display 68 Trace information 66 Diagram footer 68 Hiding restoring 129 Diagrams Evaluation method 253 Dialog boxes Slider 73 Transparency 73 Dialogs Printing 113 Suppressing file selection 117 Dirty flag see Invalid data icon 64 Display Colors 131 133 Confi...

Page 884: ...F Status message 68 External monitor Connectors 42 External reference Settings remote control 816 Status message 68 External trigger 411 Configuring power sensor 373 Level power sensor 370 Level remote 664 Power sensor 370 F Falling Slope Power sensor 371 Fast SEM 296 Consequences 297 Example 297 Multi SEM 296 298 Prerequisites 296 SEM 303 FFT filters Mode 400 FFT sweep 393 File format Export File...

Page 885: ...al 80 Group delay Smoothing 468 GTL 170 H Hardcopy see Screenshots 61 Hardware Check 139 Information 136 Supported 139 Harmonic Distortion 344 About 345 Activating remote control 612 Basics 345 Configuring 348 Measurement remote control 612 Measuring 350 RBW 349 Results 347 Results remote control 613 Sweep time 349 Harmonics Basics 345 High sensitivity 347 Measurement example 458 Measurement rules...

Page 886: ...210 Changing 28 Network 201 IP Address DNS server 212 IP configuration LXI 215 IST 183 IST flag 187 Remote 523 Items Saving 102 Settings 105 K Key DOWN 39 LEFT 39 Power 36 RIGHT 39 UP 39 Keyboard On screen 72 Keypad Overview 38 Keys MKR 424 MKR 430 436 MKR FUNCT 437 PRESET 98 RUN CONT 234 401 480 RUN SINGLE 234 401 402 481 Keywords see Mnemonics 172 L LAN Configuration 27 Configuring 213 Connector...

Page 887: ... control 79 166 Reset LCI 206 see user Manual 79 Settings 205 M Maintenance 855 Margins Limit lines 492 500 Peaks SEM 314 Peaks Spurious Emissions 336 Violation 493 Marker Information 67 Search area softkey 434 Search type softkey 434 Marker functions Deactivating 456 Measurement example 458 Marker peak list see Peak list 455 Marker Peak List Programming example 761 Marker search Spectrograms prog...

Page 888: ...to Noise 277 CP ACLR 255 Evaluation methods 90 Frequency sweep 233 Harmonic Distortion 344 OBW 281 SEM 287 Spurious Emissions 327 Time Domain Power 340 TOI 350 Zero span 233 Menus Context sensitive 71 Messages Commands 171 Instrument 171 Instrument responses 172 Interface 171 MI trace information 66 MIN 175 MINH trace information 67 Mini front panel Hiding restoring 130 Key combination 131 Using 1...

Page 889: ...ivating limits 285 432 436 Determining 284 286 Limits 285 432 435 Measurement 281 Measurement remote control 560 Measurement example 287 Multicarrier signal 282 284 286 Prerequisites 282 Results 283 Search limits 282 284 286 Occupied Bandwidth see OBW 281 OCXO 125 Offset Frequency 379 Limit lines 493 Reference level 385 Offset channel setting 65 On screen keyboard 72 73 Online help Working with 77...

Page 890: ...s 153 Positive Peak detector 460 Power Channel see Channel power 255 Harmonics 348 Key 36 Mean time domain 340 Peak time domain 340 Percent OBW 284 RMS time domain 340 Standard deviation time domain 340 Time domain 340 Power classes Adding Removing SEM 311 Ranges SEM 311 SEM 293 310 SEM results 288 Softkey 310 Used SEM 310 Power mode Band power measurement 451 CP ACLR 266 Softkey 266 Power sensors...

Page 891: ...35 Inserting SEM 307 Inserting Spurious Emissions 335 Reference SEM 292 308 Remote control Spurious Emissions 330 Rules SEM 292 Rules Spurious Emissions 329 SEM 291 Symmetrical SEM 293 RBW see Resolution Bandwidth 390 RBW channel setting 65 Ready for trigger Status register 188 Rear panel Overview 40 Rebooting Remote control 526 Recalling Settings 98 100 103 106 Settings for preset 109 Softkey 103...

Page 892: ... 811 Exporting 513 Managing 97 OBW 283 SEM 288 SEM remote 291 Storing remote 810 Revision string 834 RF attenuation Auto 386 Impact 383 Manual 386 Mode SEM range 304 Mode Spurious Emissions range 334 Noise floor 383 SEM range 304 Spurious Emissions range 334 RF input Overload protection remote 669 Remote 669 670 RF Input Connector 39 RF OVLD Error 70 858 RF OVLD status display 70 858 Rising Slope ...

Page 893: ...s ranges 311 Power classes 293 310 Power classes remote control 580 Preamplifier 304 Programming example 587 Provided settings files 320 Range start stop 303 Ranges 291 RBW 303 Reference level 304 Reference power 309 Reference range 308 Reference range remote control 578 Restoring standard files 313 Result files 318 Results 288 Results Multi SEM 290 Results remote control 587 600 Results remote 29...

Page 894: ...ing Traces 465 Traces group delay 468 Soft front panels Using 135 softkey Trace Mode remote control 603 604 Softkey bar Hiding restoring 129 Softkeys Power Bandwidth 284 ACLR Mode 265 Adjust Settings 266 280 285 349 Adjust X Axis 335 All Functions Off 456 Amplitude Config 384 Auto Level 386 420 Bandwidth Config 395 C N 280 C No 280 Carrier Noise Config 279 Center 377 Center Mkr Freq 437 Channel Ba...

Page 895: ...es remote control 693 History depth 480 Markers 478 484 Markers remote control 728 Programming example 706 Removing 483 Scaling 474 Selecting frames 402 480 Settings 479 Sweep count 474 Time frames 473 Timestamps 475 480 Trying out 46 Value range 476 485 Spectrum Application 82 Spectrum Emission Mask see SEM 287 Splitters Window size 95 Spurious Emissions 327 About 327 Configuring 331 Deleting ran...

Page 896: ...312 Storage settings File type 105 Storing Settings 98 100 String in remote commands 176 Sub blocks Number Multi SEM 308 Standard files 312 Subnet Mask 201 Suffixes 173 Common 521 Support 862 Information 142 143 Information remote 839 Suppressing File name dialog 117 Sweep Aborting 401 402 480 481 Configuration Softkey 395 Continuous 234 Count 395 Count Spectrograms 474 Default settings 390 Mode 2...

Page 897: ...ol 602 Measurement example 343 Measuring 343 Restricting range 341 Results 340 342 Time frames Configuring 402 Continuing 402 Navigating 402 475 per sweep 403 Selecting 402 480 Spectrograms 473 Time lines Remote control 767 Time trigger Repetition interval 412 Softkey 411 Timestamps Softkey Spectrogram 480 Spectrograms 475 480 TOI 350 About the measurement 351 Basics 351 Calculation method 353 Con...

Page 898: ...or 371 Hysteresis 406 412 Hysteresis Power sensor 370 Level Power sensor 370 Measurements 405 Offset 406 412 Power sensor 370 373 Slope 413 665 Slope Power sensor 371 Status register 188 Trigger In Connector 42 Trigger level 411 External trigger remote 664 I Q Power remote 665 IF Power remote 664 Trigger source 406 410 External 411 Free Run 410 IF Power 411 Time 411 Video 411 Trigger Gate Configur...

Page 899: ... Access 24 Adding 93 Adding remote 632 Arranging 94 Closing 94 Closing remote 634 637 Dialog boxes 73 Layout remote 635 Querying remote 633 Replacing remote 635 Size 95 Types remote 632 WRONG_FW Error 70 139 158 858 X X axis Adjusting Spurious Emissions 335 Limit lines 500 Transducer lines 153 X Offset Limit lines 497 X value Marker 426 Y Y axis Limit lines 500 Optimizing display 389 Scaling 384 3...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands